You are on page 1of 334

Preface

This guide provides a variety of basic information about Web GUI for the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/ DX90. It should be referred to when setting up and maintaining the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/ DX90. This guide is specially written for ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI system administrators and operators. Knowledge of UNIX or Windows systems is required. Fifth Edition July 2010

Structure of This Manual


This manual consists of the following eight chapters and two appendixes.

Chapter 1 Outline
This chapter describes the outlines, features, operation environment, and operating topology for GUI.

Chapter 2 Startup and Shutdown


This chapter describes how to start, exit, log on and log off from GUI, and information about operation screens.

Chapter 3 Initial Setup


This chapter describes the Initial Setup menu.

Chapter 4 Status Menu


This chapter describes the status display menu for the device.

Chapter 5 Configuration
This chapter describes the configuration related menu. Details for Configuration Wizard, RAID group management, volume management, and Advanced Copy management are provided.

Chapter 6 Global Settings


This chapter describes the user management, network settings, remote support settings, system settings, and Host I/F (host interface) management.

Chapter 7 Maintenance
This chapter describes the hardware maintenance procedures.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Preface

Chapter 8 Display and Download Information (Diagnosis)


This chapter describes how to display and download ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 related information. Procedures to install the site certificate of the Web site, a list of initial settings (factory default setting values), and the maximum number of concurrent volume formats are described in the Appendixes.

Latest Information
The information in this document is subject to change without notice for functionality expansion of ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 and improvement. The latest version of this document and the latest information about the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 is released in the following web-site. Access the following address if needed. http://www.fujitsu.com/global/services/computing/storage/eternus/products/diskstorage/dxentry/

Related Materials
Other manuals for the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 are as follows: ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Disk storage systems User Guide ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 CLI User Guide ETERNUS DX Disk storage systems Server Connection Guide (Fibre Channel) (*1) ETERNUS DX Disk storage systems Server Connection Guide (iSCSI) (*1) ETERNUS DX Disk storage systems Server Connection Guide (SAS) (*1)
*1: Download the required manuals for your device environment (server OS and Fibre Channel card type, etc.) from the specified web site. Refer to the Documentation CD provided with the ETERNUS DX60/ DX80/DX90 for URLs of the manual download site.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Preface

Acknowledgments
Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Server are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries. UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group in the United States and other countries. Sun, Sun Microsystems, Sun logo, Solaris, and all Solaris-related trademarks and logos are trademarks and registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. in the United States and other countries and are used under license from Sun Microsystems Inc. AIX is a trademark of IBM Corp. Linux is a registered trademark or trademark of Linus Torvalds in the United States and other countries. Red Hat, RPM, and all Red Hat-based trademarks and logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of Red Hat, Inc. in the United States and other countries. HP-UX is a trademark of Hewlett-Packard in the U.S. and other countries. VMware, VMware logos, Virtual SMP, and VMotion are either registered trademarks or trademarks of VMware, Inc. in the U.S. and/or other countries. Egenera BladeFrame and Egenera PAN Manager are trademarks or registered trademarks of Egenera, Inc. in the USA and other countries. VERITAS Volume Manager is a trademark of Symantec Corp. and its affiliated companies. Other company names, product names, and service names are registered trademarks or trademarks of their respective owners.

Abbreviations
The following products will be represented throughout this manual by the following abbreviations. Microsoft Windows 2000 Server operating system and Microsoft Windows 2000 Advanced Server operating system are abbreviated as Windows 2000. Microsoft Windows Server 2003, Standard Edition, and Microsoft Windows Server 2003, Enterprise Edition are abbreviated as Windows Server 2003. Microsoft Windows Server 2008, Standard Edition, and Microsoft Windows Server 2008, Enterprise Edition are abbreviated as Windows Server 2008. Windows Server refers to both the Windows Server 2003 and Windows Server 2008. Windows refers to all the Windows products listed here: Windows 2000, Windows Server 2003, and Windows Server 2008. Solaris Operating System is abbreviated as Solaris OS.

Screen shot(s) reprinted with permission from Microsoft Corporation. Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Contents

Chapter 1
1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4

Outline .......................................................................................9

Outline ................................................................................................................ 9 Features ........................................................................................................... 10 Operating Environment .................................................................................... 11 Operating Topology .......................................................................................... 12

Chapter 2
2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5
2.5.1 2.5.2

Startup and Shutdown ...........................................................13

Startup .............................................................................................................. 13 Logon ............................................................................................................... 15 Logoff ............................................................................................................... 17 Exit ................................................................................................................... 18 Operation Screens ........................................................................................... 19
Screen structures ...................................................................................................................... 19 User Role ................................................................................................................................... 20

Chapter 3 Chapter 4
4.1
4.1.1 4.1.2 4.1.3

Initial Setup .............................................................................26 Status Menu ............................................................................44

Storage System Status .................................................................................... 44


Storage System ......................................................................................................................... 48 Controller Enclosure .................................................................................................................. 49 Drive Enclosure ......................................................................................................................... 54

4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 4.6

RAID Group Status .......................................................................................... 57 Volume Status .................................................................................................. 59 Advanced Copy Status ..................................................................................... 61 Advanced Copy Path Status ............................................................................ 63 REC Buffer Status ............................................................................................ 65

Chapter 5
5.1 5.2
5.2.1 5.2.2 5.2.3 5.2.4 5.2.5 5.2.6

Configuration..........................................................................66

Configuration Wizard ........................................................................................ 66 RAID Group Management ................................................................................ 88


Create RAID Group ................................................................................................................... 88 Delete RAID Group .................................................................................................................... 93 Assign Hot Spare ....................................................................................................................... 94 Release Hot Spare .................................................................................................................... 96 Logical Device Expansion ......................................................................................................... 98 Set RAID Group Name ............................................................................................................ 101

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Contents

5.2.7 5.2.8

Set Eco-mode Schedule .......................................................................................................... 102 Change CM Ownership ........................................................................................................... 109

5.3
5.3.1 5.3.2 5.3.3 5.3.4 5.3.5 5.3.6 5.3.7 5.3.8 5.3.9 5.3.10

Volume Management ..................................................................................... 111


Create Volume ......................................................................................................................... 111 Delete Volume ......................................................................................................................... 114 Format Volume ........................................................................................................................ 115 Encrypt Volume ....................................................................................................................... 117 LUN Concatenation ................................................................................................................. 119 RAID Migration ........................................................................................................................ 121 Initialize Snap Data Volume .................................................................................................... 125 Release Reservation ............................................................................................................... 127 Set Volume Name ................................................................................................................... 129 Configure LUN Mapping .......................................................................................................... 130

5.4
5.4.1 5.4.2 5.4.3 5.4.4 5.4.5 5.4.6 5.4.7 5.4.8 5.4.9 5.4.10

Advanced Copy Management ........................................................................ 138


Setup Snap Data Pool ............................................................................................................. 145 Manage Copy Session ............................................................................................................ 151 Register Copy License ............................................................................................................ 154 Modify Copy Parameters ......................................................................................................... 155 Modify EC/OPC Priority ........................................................................................................... 157 Modify Copy Table Size ........................................................................................................... 159 Set Copy Path ......................................................................................................................... 163 Modify Port Mode .................................................................................................................... 182 Modify REC Multiplicity ............................................................................................................ 184 Modify REC Buffer ................................................................................................................... 186

Chapter 6
6.1
6.1.1 6.1.2 6.1.3

Global Settings .....................................................................190

User Management .......................................................................................... 190


Setup User Account ................................................................................................................. 190 Change User Password ........................................................................................................... 193 Initialize User Account ............................................................................................................. 195

6.2
6.2.1 6.2.2 6.2.3 6.2.4 6.2.5 6.2.6 6.2.7

Network Settings ............................................................................................ 197


Setup Network Environment .................................................................................................... 197 Setup SNMP Agent ................................................................................................................. 201 Download MIB File .................................................................................................................. 206 Perform SNMP Trap Test ........................................................................................................ 207 Setup E-Mail Notification ......................................................................................................... 208 Display SMTP Log ................................................................................................................... 211 Renew SSL Certificate ............................................................................................................ 212

6.3
6.3.1 6.3.2 6.3.3 6.3.4 6.3.5 6.3.6

Remote Support ............................................................................................. 214


Display Support Information .................................................................................................... 214 Display Communication Log .................................................................................................... 215 Setup Remote Support ............................................................................................................ 216 Update Customer Information ................................................................................................. 224 Update Communication Environment Information ................................................................... 226 Setup Log Sending Parameters .............................................................................................. 228

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Contents

6.3.7

Stop/Restart Remote Support ................................................................................................. 231

6.4
6.4.1 6.4.2 6.4.3 6.4.4 6.4.5 6.4.6 6.4.7

System Settings ............................................................................................. 233


Modify Date and Time ............................................................................................................. 233 Modify Storage System Name ................................................................................................. 235 Setup Encryption Mode ........................................................................................................... 236 Change Box ID ........................................................................................................................ 238 Setup Power Management ...................................................................................................... 240 Setup Subsystem Parameters ................................................................................................. 241 Setup Event Notification .......................................................................................................... 243

6.5
6.5.1 6.5.2 6.5.3 6.5.4

Host I/F Management .................................................................................... 250


Set Port Parameters ................................................................................................................ 252 Setup Host ............................................................................................................................... 261 Setup Host Response .............................................................................................................. 273 Modify Reset Group ................................................................................................................. 280

Chapter 7
7.1
7.1.1

Maintenance..........................................................................283

Hot Expansion ................................................................................................ 283


Add Drive Enclosure ................................................................................................................ 284

Chapter 8
8.1 8.2 8.3 8.4 8.5 8.6

Display and Download Information (Diagnosis)................287

Display Event Log .......................................................................................... 287 Export/Delete Log .......................................................................................... 289 Export Panic Dump ........................................................................................ 292 Start/Stop Performance Monitoring ................................................................ 295 Display Performance Information ................................................................... 298 Display Error Information ............................................................................... 299

Appendix A Install Site Certificate...........................................................301


A.1 A.2 For Internet Explorer ....................................................................................... 301 For Firefox ....................................................................................................... 306

Appendix B Factory Default List..............................................................309 Appendix C The Maximum Number of Concurrent Volume Formats ...............................................328 Index .......................................................................................................330

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 1

Outline

This chapter describes the outlines, features, operating environment, and operating topology for ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI (hereinafter referred to as "GUI"). GUI is installed in controllers of the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 (hereinafter also referred to as "the device"), and used for performing settings and maintenance via web browser.

1.1

Outline
Use GUI to set the operating environment and check status for the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/ DX90. GUI can be operated from a web browser by connecting the PC via a LAN connection.

*1 Operation Server ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 LAN Management Server Mail Server Program PC Web Browser
Web GUI
Operating via web browser

*1: Connect the operation server and the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 with a Fibre Channel (FC), iSCSI, or SAS cable.

Refer to "2.1 Startup" (page 13) for details of GUI start up.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 1 Outline > 1.2 Features

1.2

Features
The features for GUI are as follows:

Initial and basic settings by the wizard


The wizard enables you to set the minimum requirement to run the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/ DX90 by following the instructions on the wizard screen.

System status
This function displays the device installation image.

Disk configuration check function


This function displays a list of disks. It is also possible to display the number of constructible RAID groups by specifying the RAID group configuration requirements.

Checking the extent of a failure


If a disk failure occurs, "Host Port", "Affinity Group", "Volume", "RAID group", and "installation location" can be referenced to determine the extent of the failure.

Easy operation
If a hardware failure is detected, the system administrator can receive a mail containing detected failure information.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

10

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 1 Outline > 1.3 Operating Environment

1.3

Operating Environment
The following PC environment is required to use GUI.
Confirmed operating environment Browsers Image resolution Microsoft Internet Explorer Mozilla Firefox 1024 x 768 or more Version 6.0, 7.0, or 8.0 3.0.x, 3.5.x, or 3.6.x

Enable or disable the following items as the browser.


Item Temporary Internet Files (Cache) Style Sheet JavaScript Cookie Proxy Server Setting value Disable Enable Enable Enable Disable

The following example shows how to set internet options when using Internet Explorer: General (Temporary Internet files and Style Sheet) Specify the following parameters. - Temporary Internet files Select [Every visit to the page] in [Check for newer versions of stored pages]. - Accessibility Clear all the checkboxes in [Formatting] and [User style sheet] fields. Security (JavaScript) Specify one of the following items. - Custom Level Select [Enable] for [Active scripting]. - Trusted Sites Add the URL of ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90. Privacy (Cookie) Specify the following items. - Advanced Select the method for handling Cookies in [Per-Site Privacy Actions]. - Sites When allowing Cookies for the specified Web site, add the URL of ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 in [Manage Sites]. Connections (Proxy Server) Specify one of the following items in [LAN Settings]. - Clear the [Use a proxy server for your LAN] checkbox. - Click the [Advanced] button, and add the address for ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 in [Exceptions] field.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

11

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 1 Outline > 1.4 Operating Topology

1.4

Operating Topology
GUI can be operated by a PC or workstation with a web browser installed, that is connected via a LAN. Two connection topologies are allowed: Direct connection of the PC to the device Network connection via an existing LAN The operating topology diagram below shows a direct connection with a LAN cable.
Set by direct connection

ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90

Setting PC

*1

*1: Connect the setting PC and the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 with a LAN cable. Either a straight through or crossover LAN cable can be used.

The operating topology diagram below shows operation on an existing network.


Setting PC
Set via network

PC

LAN

Operation server

ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90

*2

*2: Connects the operation server and the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 using a Fibre Channel (FC), iSCSI, or SAS cable.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

12

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 2

Startup and Shutdown

This chapter describes how to start, exit, log on and log off from GUI, and information about operation screens.

2.1

Startup
Startup the logon screen for GUI. Connect the PC and the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 using a LAN cable, and display the logon screen via the web browser. The procedure to start up the logon screen for GUI is as follows:

Procedure

1 2 3

Directly connect the PC and MNT port of the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 via LAN cable. Set the IP address and subnet mask for the PC to match the ETERNUS DX60/ DX80/DX90 network settings. Enter the URL to the address bar in the web browser.
Specify "http://IP address of the device/" or "https://IP address of the device" (Default IP address is "192.168.1.1"). The logon screen for GUI is displayed. Refer to "2.2 Logon" (page 15) for detailed procedure to logon.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

13

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 2 Startup and Shutdown > 2.1 Startup

The confirmation screens for site certificate may be displayed when using SSL (https) to start up GUI (the display contents vary according to your web browser). However, this should not cause any problems. Accept the site certificate and continue the process. The following shows an example when using Internet Explorer 7. There is a problem with this website's security certificate. The security certificate presented by this website was not issued by a trusted certificate authority. Security certificate problems may indicate an attempt to fool you or intercept data you send to the server. We recommend that you close this webpage and do not continue to this Web site. This warning will not be displayed after installing the site information. Refer to "Appendix A Install Site Certificate" (page 301) for procedure to install the site certificate to the your web browser. Refer to "6.2.1 Setup Network Environment" (page 197) for procedure to set the IP address of the MNT port. The following ports should be used for http and https connections:
Protocol http https 80 443 Port to be used (Default)

End of procedure

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

14

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 2 Startup and Shutdown > 2.2 Logon

2.2

Logon
Log on to GUI to start the operation. The GUI operation screen appears. The menu displayed pertains to the logged on user role. An Advanced privilege user (CE) can access various maintenance/settings menus, a Standard user (SE) has operational access, and a Monitor user (general user) can access the status display menus. The following will cause an error. If this occurs, note the error message and try re-logging on after completing the process. Attempting to logon while four users are already logged on. Attempting to logon while another application is already logged on. The procedure for logging on is as follows:

Procedure

1 2

Select the language (English or Japanese) from the logon screen. Enter the Username and Password, and click the [Logon] button.
The Username and the Password vary depending on which account is being used to logon. Username root Password root (Default) Refer to "6.1 User Management" (page 190) for user accounts. If the input error occurs, enter the Username and Password again to log on to the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

15

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 2 Startup and Shutdown > 2.2 Logon

The operation screen appears. Up to four users can be logged on concurrently. Logging on five or more users is not allowed. Also note that when attempting to logon, another user is already logged on and performing one of the following operations, a warning message appears and some functions cannot be used. Confirm the current GUI usage state and start operation. Applying controller firmware Applying disk firmware RAID group diagnosis Disk diagnosis

End of procedure

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

16

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 2 Startup and Shutdown > 2.3 Logoff

2.3

Logoff
Log off from GUI to finish the operation. If no operation is performed for a specified period of time (60 minutes) after logging on, the relevant user is automatically logged off. The procedure for logging off is as follows:

Procedure

Click the [Logoff] link on the top right of the screen.

A confirmation screen appears.

Click the [OK] button.

This completes the logging off process. The logon screen appears.

End of procedure

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

17

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 2 Startup and Shutdown > 2.4 Exit

2.4

Exit
Exit from GUI. Make sure to perform "2.3 Logoff" (page 17) operation before exiting GUI. If exiting GUI without logging off, the logon status is not released. The procedure to exit is as follows:

Procedure

Click the [Close] button for the web browser.


Exit from GUI. The logon screen does not appear.

End of procedure

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

18

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 2 Startup and Shutdown > 2.5 Operation Screens

2.5

Operation Screens
This section provides a description about GUI operation screens. Click the [Help] link or [Help] button for a detailed explanation of the functions used during operation. An explanation (help) screen of the function is displayed. Be sure to log off after all necessary operations are completed. If the operation screen is not updated when accessing the GUI, close the web browser, and log on again.

2.5.1

Screen structures
The following shows the main contents that configure the operation screen. They are always displayed.

Global Header
ETERNUS DX60, ETERNUS DX80, or ETERNUS DX90 logo, [Logoff] and [Help] links, general status, device serial number, and date and time are displayed in the Global Header. General status of ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 is displayed as an image with character strings.

Menu Bar
Clicking the tabs in the menu bar displays sub menus related to the selected function. Clicking the sub menu with the "!" symbol displays pull-down menu options.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

19

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 2 Startup and Shutdown > 2.5 Operation Screens

Title Bar
The current function name is displayed.

2.5.2

User Role
The available menus for GUI will differ according to the account type. The following table shows the difference between user roles.
User role Advanced Available functions "Advanced" is a maintenance engineer privilege. Setting maintenance such as status display, configuration management, and maintenance functions are available. "Standard" is a system administrator privilege. Functions such as status display and configuration management are available. "Monitor" is a general user privilege. Only the status display function is available. Default account f.ce

Standard

root

Monitor

None

Settings and functions for an Advanced privilege user


Initial Setup Status Volume Settings Global Settings Maintenance Diagnosis Utilities

Settings and functions for a Standard privilege user


Initial Setup Status Volume Settings Global Settings Maintenance (Add Drive Enclosures) Diagnosis

Settings and functions for a Monitor privilege user


Status Diagnosis (Display Event Log and Display Performance Information)

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

20

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 2 Startup and Shutdown > 2.5 Operation Screens

When specifying a Slave CM IP address for accessing the logon screen, the following GUI functions can be used. Settings and functions for an Advanced privilege user - Status - Maintenance (Change Master CM) Settings and functions for a Standard privilege user - Status Settings and functions for a Monitor privilege user - Status The following table shows the availability of functions for each user role.
Chapter Startup and Shutdown Initial Setup Category Logon Logoff Set Date and Time Set Storage System Name Change Password Modify FC Port Mode Set Port Parameters Setup Network Environment Status Menu Storage System Status RAID Group Status Volume Status Advanced Copy Status Advanced Copy Path Status REC Buffer Status (*1) Configuration Configuration Wizard RAID Group Management Create RAID Group Delete RAID Group Assign Hot Spare Release Hot Spare Logical Device Expansion Set RAID Group Name Set Eco-mode Schedule Change CM Ownership Modify RAID Group Parameters
(*1) (*1)

Function

User Role Monitor OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK Standard OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK Advanced OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

21

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 2 Startup and Shutdown > 2.5 Operation Screens

Chapter Configuration

Category Volume Management

Function Create Volume Delete Volume Format Volume Encrypt Volume LUN Concatenation RAID Migration Initialize Snap Data Volume Modify Cache Parameters Release Reservation Set Volume Name Configure LUN Mapping

User Role Monitor Standard OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK Advanced OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK

Advanced Copy Management

Setup Snap Data Pool Manage Copy Session Register Copy License Modify Copy Parameters Modify EC/OPC Priority Modify Copy Table Size Set Copy Path
(*1)

Modify Port Mode (*1) Modify REC Multiplicity


(*1)

Modify REC Buffer (*1) Global Settings User Management Setup User Account Change User Password Initialize User Account Network Settings Setup Network Environment Setup SNMP Agent Download MIB File Perform SNMP Trap Test Setup E-Mail Notification Display SMTP Log Renew SSL Certificate

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

22

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 2 Startup and Shutdown > 2.5 Operation Screens

Chapter Global Settings

Category Remote Support

Function Display Support Information Display Communication Log Setup Remote Support Update Customer Information Update Communication Environment Information Setup Log Sending Parameters Stop/Restart Remote Support Download Controller Firmware Setup Firmware Update from Peer Storage System

User Role Monitor Standard OK OK OK OK OK OK Advanced OK OK OK OK OK OK

OK

OK OK OK

System Settings

Modify Date and Time Modify Storage System Name Setup Encryption Mode Change Box ID Setup Power Management Setup Subsystem Parameters Setup Disk Patrol Setup SMI-S Environment Setup Event Notification

OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK

OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK

Host I/F Management

Set Port Parameters Setup Host Setup Host Response Modify Reset Group

Maintenance

Start/End Maintenance

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

23

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 2 Startup and Shutdown > 2.5 Operation Screens

Chapter Maintenance

Category Hardware Maintenance

Function Hot Maintenance (*2) Concurrent Preventive Maintenance Force Disable Force Enable Add Drive Enclosure Remove Drive Enclosure Add Disk (*2) Reduce Disk Add Controller Module

User Role Monitor Standard OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK Advanced OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK

Firmware Maintenance

Apply Controller Firmware Register Disk Firmware Apply Disk Firmware Delete Disk Firmware

Clear Sense Data Diagnosis Display Event Log Export/Delete Log Export Panic Dump Start/Stop Performance Monitoring Display Performance Information Display Error Information Export Configuration Get G-List Utilities Shutdown/Restart Storage System Initialize System Disks Cache Utilities Recovery Utilities Manage Pinned Data Force Write Back Apply Configuration Backup Configuration Reset Backup/Restore Fail Force Restore Reset Machine Down Recovery Fail Reboot All CMs Change Master CM (*3) Diagnostic Utilities Perform Disk Diagnostic Perform RAID Group Diagnostic

OK OK

OK: Available : Not available

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

24

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 2 Startup and Shutdown > 2.5 Operation Screens

*1: *2: *3:

Function displayed for ETERNUS DX90. Function does not require any operation from GUI. Function displayed when specifying Slave CM IP address for accessing the logon screen.

Some functions are not displayed for some firmware versions and device model names. "5.3.4 Encrypt Volume" (page 117) function will be available after using the "6.4.3 Setup Encryption Mode" (page 236) function. However, when the encryption function is not available, the "Setup Encryption Mode" is not displayed in the menu.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

25

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 3

Initial Setup

This chapter describes the Initial Setup menu. This menu supports the initial setup required before starting operations.

Set Date and Time


This screen is used to set the time/date and time zone (device location) of the internal clock.

Set Storage System Name


This screen is used to set the name, administrator, and installation site of the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Disk storage system. Information registered in this screen is used for the following functions and screens: - Network management using SNMP - Storage system name displayed in logon screen and operation screens - Friendly Name (storage system name)(*1) for Virtual Disk Service (VDS)
*1: VDS is a storage management function of the Windows Server.

Change Password
Change the password for the default account before starting operations.

Modify Port Mode


This menu is available when using an ETERNUS DX90. Change the port mode (Channel Adapter (CA) or Remote Adapter (RA)). - CA Used for connecting to the host. - RA Used for performing REC.

Set Port Parameters


Set the connection information for ports. There are three types of Host I/F; FC, iSCSI, and SAS. Procedures for setting port parameters vary depending on the Host I/F types.

Setup Network Environment


Set the environment for the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Disk storage system to communicate on the network such as IP address and subnet mask.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

26

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 3 Initial Setup >

Note that the value specified in the Initial Setup menu can be changed subsequently. Refer to the following sections for details.
Initial Setup Set Date and Time Set Storage System Name Change Password Modify Port Mode Set Port Parameters Setup Network Environment
Refer

Refer to: "6.4.1 Modify Date and Time" (page 233) "6.4.2 Modify Storage System Name" (page 235) "6.1.2 Change User Password" (page 193) "5.4.8 Modify Port Mode" (page 182) "6.5.1 Set Port Parameters" (page 252) "6.2.1 Setup Network Environment" (page 197)

Refer

Refer

Refer

Refer

Refer

Start the Initial Setup. The initial setup procedure is as follows:

Procedure

1 2

Click the [Initial Setup] menu on the [Easy Setup] tab.


The Start screen of the [Initial Setup] function appears.

Click the [Next >] button.

Initial Setup starts. The "Set Date and Time" screen appears.

Set the following parameters, and click the [Next >] button.
Date/Time Information - Current Time Current date and time setting is displayed. - Date To change the "Current Time", input the new date and time.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

27

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 3 Initial Setup >

Time Zone Set the time difference (GMT). - Time Zone Select the Time Zone from the list box. If the appropriate Time Zone does not exist, select "Manually", and specify the time difference using "+" or "-", hour, and minute. Daylight Saving Time - Set Select whether to set the Daylight Saving Time "ON" or "OFF" with the radio button. - Range If "Set" is "ON", set the Daylight Saving Time period. Select "by day of the week" or "by Date" with the radio button, and input the required parameters. When selecting "by day of the week", "Last" can be selected to specify the start or end week. When selecting "by Date", "Last Date" can be deleted to specify the start or end date. NTP Service - NTP server Select "NTP enabled" or "NTP disabled" with the radio button. When NTP is enabled, input the IP address or domain name for the NTP server in the text box. ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 is synchronized with the NTP server in a step mode fashion. - LAN Port used for NTP Select the LAN port to be used for NTP connection from "MNT" or "RMT". - Access Status Access state to the NTP server is displayed. Click the [Skip >>] button to move on to the next screen without setting.

A confirmation screen appears.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

28

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 3 Initial Setup >

Click the [OK] button.

The date and time setting is set, and the "Set Storage System Name" screen appears.

Set the following parameters, and click the [Next >] button.
Name Specify the storage system name. Between 1 and 16 alphanumeric characters, symbols (except ', (comma)' and '?', and '% used as the first letter'), and blanks can be used. Installation Location Specify the installation location of the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90. Between 1 and 50 alphanumeric characters, symbols (except ', (comma)' and '?', and '% used as the first letter'), and blanks can be used. Administrator Specify the system administrator name. Between 1 and 50 alphanumeric characters, symbols (except ', (comma)' and '?', and '% used as the first letter'), and blanks can be used. Description Specify the description of the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90. Between 1 and 50 alphanumeric characters, symbols (except ', (comma)' and '?', and '% used as the first letter'), and blanks can be used. When setting the storage system name, all parameters in this menu must be set. Once a parameter value is specified, the parameter cannot be deleted (values can be changed).

A confirmation screen appears.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

29

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 3 Initial Setup >

Click the [OK] button.

The storage system name is set, and the "Change Password" screen appears.

Set the following parameters, and click the [Next >] button.
User Name The current (your) user account name is displayed. User Role The current (your) user role is displayed. Old Password Enter the current password. New Password Enter the new password between 4 to 16 characters. Alphanumeric characters and symbols ('! (exclamation mark)', '- (hyphen)', '_ (underscore)', and '. (period)') can be used. Confirm New Password Enter the same character strings as the value entered in the "New Password" field for confirmation. When changing a user password, an error occurs in the following conditions. When the "Old password" does not match the current password When the "Old password", "New Password", and/or "Confirm New Password" is not entered When the password does not match the confirmation password When the password is less than 4, or more than 16 characters (If 17 or more characters are entered, ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 ignores the 17th and later characters, and the password is registered using the first 16 characters only) When the password includes characters other than alphanumeric characters and symbols ('! (exclamation mark)', '- (hyphen)', '_ (underscore)', and '. (period)')

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

30

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 3 Initial Setup >

A confirmation screen appears.

Click the [OK] button.

The password is changed. For ETERNUS DX60/DX80, the "Set Port Parameters" screen in Step 11 appears. For ETERNUS DX90, the "Modify Port Mode" screen in Step 9 appears.

Specify the Port Mode (After) and click the [Next >] button.

A confirmation screen appears.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

31

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 3 Initial Setup >

10 Click the [OK] button.

The port mode is changed, and the "Set Port Parameters" screen appears.

11 Set the following parameters, and click the [Next >] button.
Set FC Port Parameters
When the port mode is "CA" - Port Select the target port. - Port Mode Port mode for the target port is displayed. - Connection Select the connection method for the target port from the "Fabric" or "FC-AL". When "FC-AL" is selected, it is necessary to assign a Loop ID to the port. - Set Loop ID When the "Connection" is "FC-AL", select "Manual" or "Auto" to specify the Loop ID. - Loop ID When the "Set Loop ID" is "Manual", specify the Loop ID (last 2 digits of 0x00 to 0x7D). When the "Set Loop ID" is "Auto", select "Ascending" or "Descending". - Transfer Rate (Gbit/s) Select the transfer speed of the target port from the following: For 4Gbit/s models - Auto Negotiation - 1 - 2 - 4 For 8Gbit/s models - Auto Negotiation - 2 - 4 - 8 - Frame Size (bytes) Select the frame size of the target port according to the destination server or switch (2048, 1024, or 512). - Host Affinity Select whether to "Enable" or "Disable" the Host Affinity function for the target port. Select "Enable" when restricting access to volumes for each server (when connecting via switches). Select "Disable" when restricting access to volumes for each port (when connecting directly to the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90). When connecting multiple servers and the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 directly and restricting access to volumes for each server, enable the Host Affinity setting.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

32

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 3 Initial Setup >

- Host Response When the "Host Affinity" is "Disabled", select the host response to allocate to the target port. 0:Default The initial pattern is displayed. Sense information is not converted. Host Response (Number:Name) Identification number of the host response registered in the ETERNUS DX60/ DX80/DX90 is displayed. When the host response name is registered, it is also displayed. - Reset Scope Select the reset scope from "I_T_L" or "T_L". Reset scope is the range where the command reset request from the server is performed, when the port is connected to multiple servers. I_T_L (I: Initiator, T: Target, L: LUN) Reset (cancel) the command request from the server that sent the command reset request. T_L (T: Target, L: LUN) Reset (cancel) the command request from all servers that are connected to the port (regardless of whether the LUN is recognized). - Release Reservation if Chip is Reset Select whether to "Enable" or "Disable" the function to release the volume's reserved status when the target port (chip) is in Reset status.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

33

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 3 Initial Setup >

When the port mode is "RA" - Port Select the target port. - Port Mode Port mode for the target port is displayed. - Connection Select the connection method for the target port from the "Fabric" or "FC-AL". When "FC-AL" is selected, it is necessary to assign a Loop ID to the port. - Set Loop ID When the "Connection" is "FC-AL", select "Manual" or "Auto" to specify the Loop ID. - Loop ID When the "Set Loop ID" is "Manual", specify the Loop ID (last 2 digits of 0x00 to 0x7D). When the "Set Loop ID" is "Auto", select "Ascending" or "Descending". - Transfer Rate (Gbit/s) Select the transfer speed of the target port from the following: Auto Negotiation 2 4 8

Clicking the [Copy] button displays the screen for selecting the copy destination port. The port parameters are copied to the selected port.Note that copy can be performed between ports that have the same port mode.

Set iSCSI Port Parameters


- Port Select the target port. - IP Address Specify the IP address (0 to 255) for the target port (required).

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

34

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 3 Initial Setup >

Click the [Test Connection (ping)] button to display the [Send ping Command] screen. Specify the IP address of the connection destination device whose connection status is to be checked and number of execution, and click the [Send] button. Sending the "ping" command enables you to check whether the IP address is allocated correctly, and connection path to the destination device is normal. - Subnet Mask Set the subnet mask (0 to 255) for the target port (required). - Default Gateway Set the default gateway for the target port. - iSNS Server Select wether to use the iSNS server in the target port. When "Enable" is selected, specify the IP address (0 to 255) for the iSNS server. Internet Storage Name Service (iSNS) is almost equivalent to Domain Name System (DNS) for the Internet. iSNS server is used to convert the iSCSI name to the IP address on the iSCSI network. - iSCSI Name Set the iSCSI name for the target port. Between 1 and 233 alphanumeric characters and symbols (- (hyphen), : (colon), . (period)) can be used. Click the [Default] button to set the default iSCSI name. An iSCSI name is a unique name in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80. The same iSCSI name cannot be set to multiple iSCSI ports except the device iSCSI name. - Alias Name Set the alias name for the target port. Between 1 and 31 alphanumeric characters and symbols (including blanks) can be used. While the iSCSI name is a formal nomenclature that specifies the target iSCSI port, an alias name is used as nickname. - Host Affinity Select whether to "Enable" or "Disable" the Host Affinity function for the target port. Select "Enable" when restricting access to volumes for each server (when connecting via switches). Select "Disable" when restricting access to volumes for each port (when connecting directly to the ETERNUS DX60/DX80). When connecting multiple servers and the ETERNUS DX60/DX80 directly and restricting access to volumes for each server, enable the Host Affinity setting. - Host Response When the "Host Affinity" is "Disabled", select the host response to allocate to the target port. 0:Default The initial pattern is displayed. Sense information is not converted.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

35

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 3 Initial Setup >

Host Response (Number:Name) Identification number of the host response registered in the ETERNUS DX60/ DX80 is displayed. When the host response name is registered, it is also displayed. - Jumbo Frame Select whether to enable or disable the Jumbo Frame. Select "Enable" when using the Jumbo Frame to transfer data via the target port. When not using the Jumbo Frame, select "Disable". Enabling Jumbo Frame increases the amount of data to be transferred per Frame, making data transfer more efficient. Confirm that the connected device (*1) supports the Jumbo Frame before enabling the Jumbo Frame.
*1: When the ETERNUS DX60/DX80 and server are connected directly, this indicates that the connected device is a server side LAN card (NIC). When the ETERNUS DX60/ DX80 and server are connected via a switch, this indicates that the connected device is a switch.

- Transfer Rate Select the transfer speed of the target port from the following: Auto Negotiation 100Mbit/s 1Gbit/s Note that since the ETERNUS DX60/DX80 iSCSI port does not support the Half-Duplex mode, the connected device (*1) must be set as follows.
Transfer speed of the ETERNUS DX60/DX80 Auto Negotiation 100Mbit/s 1Gbit/s *1: Transfer speed of the connected device (*1) Auto Negotiation 100Mbit/s (Full) 1Gbit/s

When the ETERNUS DX60/DX80 and server are connected directly, this indicates that the connected device is a server side LAN card (NIC). When the ETERNUS DX60/DX80 and server are connected via a switch, this indicates that the connected device is a switch.

- Reset Scope Select the reset scope from "I_T_L" or "T_L". Reset scope is the range where the command reset request from the server is performed, when the port is connected to multiple servers. I_T_L (I: Initiator, T: Target, L: LUN) Reset (cancel) the command request from the server that sent the command reset request. T_L (T: Target, L: LUN) Reset (cancel) the command request from all servers that are connected to the port (regardless of whether the LUN is recognized). - Release Reservation if Chip is Reset Select whether to "Enable" or "Disable" the function to release the volume's reserved status when the target port (chip) is in Reset status.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

36

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 3 Initial Setup >

- CHAP Select "ON" when enabling CHAP authentication for the target port. To disable, select "OFF". For CHAP authentication, an encrypted password based on a random key that the ETERNUS DX60/DX80 receives from the host is sent, and connection possibility is judged on the server side. - CHAP User Name When "ON" is selected for "CHAP", specify the user name that accesses the target port. Between 0 and 255 characters of alphanumeric characters and symbols (including blanks) can be used. This setting is required when CHAP authentication (Bidirectional CHAP) is used. Make sure to set the user name and password in pairs. - Change CHAP Password When changing the CHAP password, select the checkbox. This checkbox can only be selected when "ON" is selected for "CHAP" and the password has already been set. - Password Specify the password for the currently specifying "Chap User Name". - New Password When "ON" is elected for "CHAP", specify the password that accesses the target port. Between 12 and 100 alphanumeric characters and symbols (including blanks) can be used. Make sure to set the user name and password in pairs. - Confirm new Password Input the same character strings as the value entered in the "New Password" field for confirmation. - Header Digest Select "OFF" when not adding Header Digest of the target port. When adding, select "CRC32C". Header Digest is a check code to be added to the header part of the iSCSI port detailed information. Specify "CRC32C" when the host requests to add the check code. "CRC32C" is algorithmic to create a check code. - Data Digest Select "OFF" when not adding Data Digest of the target port. When adding, select "CRC32C". Data Digest is a check code to be added to the data area of the iSCSI port detailed information. Specify "CRC32C" when the host requests to add the check code. "CRC32C" is algorithmic to create a check code.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

37

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 3 Initial Setup >

[Set iSCSI Port Parameters] screen (1/2)

[Set iSCSI Port Parameters] screen (2/2)

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

38

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 3 Initial Setup >

Set SAS Port Parameters


- Port Select the target port. - Host Affinity Select whether to "Enable" or "Disable" the Host Affinity function for the target port. Select "Enable" when restricting access to volumes for each server. Select "Disable" when restricting access to volumes for each port. When connecting multiple servers and the ETERNUS DX60/DX80 directly and restricting access to volumes for each server, enable the Host Affinity setting. - Host Response When the "Host Affinity" is "Disabled", select the host response to allocate to the target port. 0:Default The initial pattern is displayed. Sense information is not converted. Host Response (Number:Name) Identification number of the host response registered in the ETERNUS DX60/ DX80 is displayed. When the host response name is registered, it is also displayed. - Reset Scope Select the reset scope from "I_T_L" or "T_L". Reset scope is the range where the command reset request from the server is performed, when the port is connected to multiple servers. I_T_L (I: Initiator, T: Target, L: LUN) Reset (cancel) the command request from the server that sent the command reset request. T_L (T: Target, L: LUN) Reset (cancel) the command request from all servers that are connected to the port (regardless of whether the LUN is recognized). - Release Reservation if Chip is Reset Select whether to "Enable" or "Disable" the function to release the volume's reserved status when the target port (chip) is in Reset status.

A confirmation screen appears.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

39

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 3 Initial Setup >

12 Click the [OK] button.

The port parameters are set, and the "Setup Network Environment" screen appears.

13 Set the following parameters, and click the [Next >] button.
Select Network Port Select the port to be used from the "MNT" or "RMT". Interface - Speed and Duplex Select the communication speed and mode from the following. Auto Negotiation 1Gbit/s 100Mbit/s Half 100Mbit/s Full 10Mbit/s Half 10Mbit/s Full - Master CM IP Address Enter the IP address (0 to 255) for the Master CM in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/ DX90 Disk storage system. - Slave CM IP Address Enter the IP address (0 to 255) for the Slave CM in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/ DX90 Disk storage system. This setting is required to duplicate LAN path. When the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 has only one CM, a Slave IP address cannot be specified. - Subnet Mask Set the subnet mask (0 to 255) for the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Disk storage system. - Default Gateway Set the default gateway address (0 to 255) for the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Disk storage system. - Primary DNS Set the IP address for the Primary DNS server (0 to 255) for the ETERNUS DX60/ DX80/DX90 Disk storage system. - Secondary DNS Set the IP address for the Secondary DNS server (0 to 255) for the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Disk storage system. - http Select whether to "Enable" or "Disable" the http connection. This connection is used when accessing from GUI. - https Select whether to "Enable" or "Disable" the https connection. This connection is used when accessing from GUI.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

40

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 3 Initial Setup >

- telnet Select whether to "Enable" or "Disable" the telnet connection. This connection is used when accessing from CLI. - SSH Select whether to "Enable" or "Disable" the SSH connection. This connection is used when accessing from CLI. - Maintenance Select whether to "Enable" or "Disable" the Maintenance connection. This connection is used when accessing from the monitoring software. - Maintenance-Secure Select whether to "Enable" or "Disable" the Maintenance-Secure connection. This connection is used when accessing from the monitoring software. This connection uses the data encryption for data transferring. - ICMP Select whether to "Enable" or "Disable" the ICMP connection. This connection is used when transferring ping command from PC. Allowed IP List The value entered in this field is enabled when the default gateway has been set. Set the destination network address (IP address and subnet mask). Up to 16 addresses can be set. Make sure to set the IP address and subnet mask in pairs. Note the following when specifying the IP address and subnet mask. - Specify the IP address using IPv4 notation (character string in d.d.d.d format based on the 256 radix system). - RMT port is used when it is required to use the dedicated network for Remote Support. IP addresses for the RMT port and MNT port must be in different subnets. - "Slave CM IP Address" is specified when connecting to the Slave CM. IP addresses for the Slave CM and Master CM must be in the same subnet. - Specify the IP address of "Default Gateway" when allowing access from outside of the subnetwork. The IP address must be in the same subnetwork as the port. - For "Allowed IP List", specify the IP address or network address that allows access to the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/ DX90. These settings are not required for access from the network address (same subnetwork) which the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 belongs to. Access to the device will not be allowed if all protocol ports are disabled. When access to the device is not allowed, refer to "ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Disk storage systems User Guide" to reset the settings.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

41

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 3 Initial Setup >

For the two CMs in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90, the CM that has the priority to manage the device is called the Master CM, and the other is called the Slave CM. If a CM or LAN failure occurs, ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 changes the Master CM automatically. The IP address for prior Master CM is taken over to the new Master CM. Specifying an IP address for the Slave CM enables forcible changing of the Master CM. When an error occurs and access to the Master CM is disabled, users can access the Slave CM and change the Master CM.

A confirmation screen appears.

14 Click the [OK] button.

The Network Environment is set, and the "Finish" screen appears.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

42

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 3 Initial Setup >

15 Click the [Finish] button.

The [Initial Setup] completes. Device setting operation cannot be continued if the IP address is changed. Logon again with the new IP address is required.

End of procedure

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

43

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 4

Status Menu

This chapter describes the following status display menu. Storage System Status RAID Group Status Volume Status Advanced Copy Status Advanced Copy Path Status REC Buffer Status

4.1

Storage System Status


This function is used to check the status of components configuring the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/ DX90. Status of each component in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 is monitored periodically, and the result is displayed as a general status image with character strings.

General Status
The general status of ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 is displayed as an image with character strings in the Global Header. The general status is determined by each component status.

A "Normal (green)" general status image indicates normal status, while other color images indicate a failure. The following table shows an each status images.
Image (Green) (Red) (Red) "Not Ready" is a status where an abnormality is detected at a power-off, and I/O access from the host cannot be received. ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 is in error state. Description ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 is in normal state.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

44

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 4 Status Menu > 4.1 Storage System Status

Image (Orange)

Description ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 is under maintenance. ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 is in warning state. (Yellow) (Gray) The component is installed in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90, but not used.

General status image display priority


A general status image is determined by integrated status of components such as Controller Enclosure, Drive Enclosure, and cables, which configures the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90. The following shows the general status display priority. High (Red: Not Ready) (Red: Error) (Orange: During

maintenance work)

(Yellow: Warning)

(Green: Normal)

(Gray: Installed, but not used) Low When the general status is changed, check the component status. Expand the device tree in the [Storage System Status] menu on the [Status] tab, and select the target component.

Component Status
Status of each component is displayed as a status symbol in the device tree of [Storage System Status] menu on the [Status] tab. The following table shows the component status symbols.
Symbol (Green) (Red) (Yellow) (Orange) (Blue) Description The component is in normal status. An error occurs in the component. The component requires the preventive maintenance. The component is under maintenance. The component is installed, but not used. (Caution) If a disk is in this state, "Normal (green)" is displayed instead of "Warning (yellow)" as a general status. Status other than described above is detected in the component.

(Gray)

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

45

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 4 Status Menu > 4.1 Storage System Status

Component list
The following table shows the each component name in the device tree displayed on the left of the [Storage System Status] menu.
Component name Enclosure (Storage system name registered in the "Chapter 3 Initial Setup" (page 26) or "6.4.2 Modify Storage System Name" (page 235)) Controller Enclosure Drive Enclosure Controller Module Expander Port Power Supply Unit Disks Disk SAS Cable Description Storage system name Remarks

Controller enclosure Drive enclosure Controller module Expander Host I/F port PSU (Power Supply Unit) All disks in the device Each disk in the controller enclosure or drive enclosure SAS cable

Displayed under the "Controller Enclosure". Displayed under the "Drive Enclosure". Displayed under the "Controller Module". Displayed under the "Controller Enclosure" and "Drive Enclosure". Displayed under the "Disks".

The procedure to display the storage system status is as follows:

Procedure

Click the [Storage System Status] menu on the [Status] tab.


The [Storage System Status] screen appears. The device tree in the left of the screen displays the components that configure the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

46

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 4 Status Menu > 4.1 Storage System Status

Clicking the [Manual Refresh] or [Auto-refresh] button changes the status refresh mode. - [Manual Refresh] button The displayed information is not updated automatically (Manual Refresh mode). Click the [Refresh] button to display the latest information. - [Auto-refresh] button (Default) The displayed information is automatically updated every one minute (Auto-refresh mode). Clicking the [Refresh] button updates and displays the latest information.

Click the component icon to display the status.


Detailed information of the selected component is displayed on the right of the screen.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

47

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 4 Status Menu > 4.1 Storage System Status

For details about displayed information, refer to the following sections. When clicking the [Turn on locator beacon] button, "IDENTIFY LED" on the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 front cover blinks blue or turns off. This button is used to identify the target controller or drive enclosure.

End of procedure

4.1.1

Storage System
Detailed information of the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 is displayed.

Enclosure Status Display


The following contents are displayed for the enclosure status display.
Display contents Enclosure View Name Storage system name ("Friendly Name" for the VDS (*1)) Refer to "6.4.2 Modify Storage System Name" (page 235) for detailed procedure to register the storage system name. Model name (product ID) of the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Serial number of the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 The device identification number is displayed. General status of the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Operational state of the cache (factor of "Write Through" state) (Write Back Mode / Write Through Mode (Pinned Data / Battery / Maintenance)) Status of the remote support (Operating / Stopping / Maintenance / Not Configured) Operational state of the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 (Active / Maintenance) Controller module that can be controlled via GUI Current controller firmware version Status of the controller enclosure Status of the drive enclosure Number of the system message Details of the system message Description

Model Name Serial Number Device Identification Number Status Cache Mode

Remote Support Operation Mode Controller Module connected to the GUI Firmware Version Controller Enclosure Drive Enclosure System Message No. Message *1:

Virtual Disk Service (VDS) is a storage management function of the Windows Server.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

48

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 4 Status Menu > 4.1 Storage System Status

4.1.2

Controller Enclosure
This screen shows the status of controller enclosure and its components.

Controller Enclosure Status Display


The following contents are displayed for the Controller Enclosure status display.
Display contents Controller Enclosure Display Front View Rear View Information CE information Serial Number Other Information Intake Temp Exhaust Temp Front View Status, Capacity, Speed (rpm), Type, Usage, and RAID group of each component (disk) Rear View Status and Expanded Information of each component (CM and PSU) are displayed Serial number of the controller enclosure Other information for the controller enclosure External temperature status of the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 (Normal / Error / Warning) Internal temperature status of the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 (Normal / Error / Warning) Installation diagram for the front of the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Installation diagram for the rear of the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Description

Controller Module Status Display


The following contents are displayed for the Controller Module status display.
Display contents CM Display Rear View CM Information CM Information Location Status Number of the controller module Status of the controller module (Normal / Maintenance / Error / Check1 / Undefined / Unconnected / Unmounted / Warning) Status code of the controller module Error factor of the controller module Cache memory capacity of the controller module (GB) Type of the Host I/F port installed in the controller module (Fibre Channel (FC) model / iSCSI model / SAS model) WWN of the controller module Component number of the controller module Serial number of the controller module Hardware revision of the controller module Installation diagram for the rear of the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Description

Status Code Error Code Memory Size (GB) Type WWN (for FC model or SAS model) Part Number Serial Number Hardware Revision

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

49

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 4 Status Menu > 4.1 Storage System Status

Display contents CPU Clock (MHz/GHz) Active EC Next EC

Description Clock frequency of the CPU in the controller module Edition Control (EC) number of the currently running firmware EC number of the firmware that is to be run after the next power-on

CM Internal Parts Information Status, Error Code, and Note for the following Parts (components) are displayed.

- [for FC model / iSCSI model / SAS model] Memory BE Expander BE EXP Port DI Port SCU NAND Controller Flash ROM - [for FC model only] SAS Cable FC Port - [for iSCSI model only] SAS Cable iSCSI Port - [for SAS model only] SAS Port FE Expander

Port Status Display (for FC model)


The following contents are displayed for the FC port status display.
Display contents CM Display Rear View CM Port Information Location Port Mode (*1) Status Status Code Error Code Type Connection Loop ID Number of the port Mode of the port (CA / RA) Status of the port (Normal / Maintenance / Error / Undefined) Status code of the port Error factor of the port FC port type Connection method to the host (Loop / Fabric) Allocated ID when the fixed Loop ID is used (0x00 0x7D) Installation diagram for the rear of the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Description

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

50

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 4 Status Menu > 4.1 Storage System Status

Display contents Transfer Rate

Description Port transfer rate (For 4Gbit/s model: 4Gbit/s / 2Gbit/s / 1Gbit/s / Auto Negotiation) (For 8Gbit/s model: 8Gbit/s / 4Gbit/s / 2Gbit/s / Auto Negotiation) Link status (For 4Gbit/s model: 4Gbit/s Link Up / 2Gbit/s Link Up / 1Gbit/s Link Up / Link Down) (For 8Gbit/s model: 8Gbit/s Link Up / 4Gbit/s Link Up / 2Gbit/s Link Up / Link Down) WWN of the port Current Host Affinity function setting (enabled or disabled) Host response allocated to the port when the Host Affinity function is not used Component number of the port Serial number of the port Hardware revision of the port

Link Status

WWN Host Affinity Host Response Part Number Serial Number Hardware Revision *1:

This item is displayed for ETERNUS DX90.

Port Status Display (for iSCSI model)


The following contents are displayed for the iSCSI port status display.
Display contents CM Display Rear View CM Port Information Location Status Status Code Error Code Type Transfer Rate Link Status iSCSI Name iSCSI Alias Name Host Affinity Host Response Number of the port Status of the port (Normal / Maintenance / Error / Undefined) Status code of the port Error factor of the port iSCSI port type Port transfer rate (1Gbit/s / 100Mbit/s / Auto Negotiation) Link status (1Gbit/s Link Up / 100Mbit/s Link Up / Link Down) iSCSI name of the port iSCSI alias name of the port Current Host Affinity function setting (enabled or disabled) Host response allocated to the port when the Host Affinity function is not used Installation diagram for the rear of the ETERNUS DX60/DX80 Description

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

51

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 4 Status Menu > 4.1 Storage System Status

Port Status Display (for SAS model)


The following contents are displayed for the SAS port status display.
Display contents CM Display Rear View CM Port Information Location Status Status Code Error Code Type Transfer Rate Link Status Number of the port Status of the port (Normal / Maintenance / Error / Undefined) Status code of the port Error factor of the port SAS port type Port transfer rate (3Gbit/s) Link status (Phy#0: 3.0Gbit/s Link Up / 1.5Gbit/s Link Up / Link Down) (Phy#1: 3.0Gbit/s Link Up / 1.5Gbit/s Link Up / Link Down) (Phy#2: 3.0Gbit/s Link Up / 1.5Gbit/s Link Up / Link Down) (Phy#3: 3.0Gbit/s Link Up / 1.5Gbit/s Link Up / Link Down) SAS Address of the port Current Host Affinity function setting (enabled or disabled) Host response allocated to the port when the Host Affinity function is not used. Installation diagram for the rear of the ETERNUS DX60/DX80 Description

SAS Address Host Affinity Host Response

SAS Cable Status Display


The following contents are displayed for the SAS cable status display.
Display contents Controller Enclosure Display Rear View CM SAS Cable Information Status Status Code Error Code Status of the SAS cable (Normal / Error / Maintenance / Warning) Status code of the SAS cable Error factor of the SAS cable Installation diagram for the rear of the ETERNUS DX60/DX80 Description

Power Supply Unit Status Display


The following contents are displayed for the Power Supply Unit (PSU) status display.
Display contents CE PSU Display Rear View CE PSU Information Location Status Status Code Error Code Number of the power supply unit Status of the power supply unit (Normal / Error / Maintenance) Status code of the power supply unit Error factor of the power supply unit Installation diagram for the rear of the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Description

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

52

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 4 Status Menu > 4.1 Storage System Status

Display contents Part Number Serial Number Hardware Revision

Description Component number of the power supply unit Serial number of the power supply unit Hardware revision of the power supply unit

Disks Status Display


The following contents are displayed for the Disks status display.
Display contents Controller Enclosure Display Front View Information Front View Status, Capacity, Speed (rpm), Type, Usage, and RAID group for each component (disk) are displayed Installation diagram for the front of the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Description

Disk Status Display


The following contents are displayed for the Disk status display.
Display contents Controller Enclosure Disk Display Front View Information Location Status Disk slot number Status of the disk (Unknown / Available / Broken / Not Available / Not Supported / Present / Readying / Rebuild / Copyback / Failed Usable / Spare / Formatting / Not Format / Not Exist / Redundant Copy) Status code of the disk Error factor of the disk Disk capacity (GB / TB) Disk size (2.5" / 3.5") and type (SAS / SSD) Speed of the disk Usage of the disk (Data / System / Spare / ) RAID group where disks are registered Status of the disk motor (Active / In the Boot Process / Idle / In the Stop Process) Rebuild/Copyback progress (%) Vendor ID of the disk Product name of the disk Serial number of the disk WWN for the disk Disk firmware version Installation diagram for the front of the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Description

Status Code Error Code Capacity Type Speed (rpm) Usage RAID Group Motor Status Rebuild/Copyback Progress Vender ID Product ID Serial Number WWN Firmware Revision

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

53

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 4 Status Menu > 4.1 Storage System Status

4.1.3

Drive Enclosure
This screen shows the status of drive enclosure and its components.

Drive Enclosure Status Display


The following contents are displayed for the Drive Enclosure status display.
Display contents Drive Enclosure Display Front View Rear View Information DE Information Serial Number Other Information Intake Temp Exhaust Temp Front View Status, Capacity, Speed (rpm), Type, Usage, and RAID group of each component (disk) Rear View Status and Expanded Information of each component (EXP and PSU) are displayed Serial number of the drive enclosure Other information for the drive enclosure External temperature status of the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 (Normal / Error / Warning) Internal temperature status of the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 (Normal / Error / Warning) Installation diagram for the front of the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Installation diagram for the rear of the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Description

Expander Status Display


The following contents are displayed for the Expander status display.
Display contents Drive Enclosure Display Rear View DE EXP Information DE EXP Information Status Status Code Error Code WWN Part Number Serial Number Hardware Revision Active EC Next EC Status of the expander (Normal / Maintenance / Error / Undefined / Warning) Status code of the expander Error factor of the expander WWN of the expander Component number of the expander Serial number of the expander Hardware revision of the expander EC number of the currently running firmware EC number of the firmware that is to be run after the next power-on Installation diagram for the rear of the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Description

DE EXP Internal Parts Information Status and error code of each component (SAS Cable) are displayed

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

54

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 4 Status Menu > 4.1 Storage System Status

SAS Cable Status Display


The following contents are displayed for the SAS cable status display.
Display contents Drive Enclosure Display Rear View Installation diagram for the rear of the ETERNUS DX60/DX80 Status of the SAS cable (Normal / Error / Maintenance / Warning) Status code of the SAS cable Error factor of the SAS cable DE EXP SAS Cable Information Status Status Code Error Code Description

Power Supply Unit Status Display


The following contents are displayed for the Power Supply Unit (PSU) status display.
Display contents DE PSU Display Rear View DE PSU Information Location Status Status Code Error Code Part Number Serial Number Hardware Revision Number of the power supply unit Status of the power supply unit (Normal / Error / Maintenance) Status code of the power supply unit Error factor of the power supply unit Component number of the power supply unit Serial number of the power supply unit Hardware revision of the power supply unit Installation diagram for the rear of the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Description

Disks Status Display


The following contents are displayed for the Disks status display.
Display contents Drive Enclosure Display Front View Information Front View Status, Capacity, Speed (rpm), Type, Usage, and RAID group for each component (disk) are displayed Installation diagram for the front of the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Description

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

55

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 4 Status Menu > 4.1 Storage System Status

Disk Status Display


The following contents are displayed for the Disk status display.
Display contents Drive Enclosure Disk Display Front View information Location Status Disk slot number Status of the disk (Unknown / Available / Broken / Not Available / Not Supported / Present / Readying / Rebuild/Copyback / Failed Usable / Spare / Formatting / Not Format / Not Exist / Redundant Copy) Status code of the disk Error factor of the disk Disk capacity (GB / TB) Disk size (2.5" / 3.5") and type (SAS / SSD) Speed of the disk Usage of the disk (Data / System / Spare / ) RAID group where disks are registered Status of the disk motor (Active / In the Boot Process / Idle / In the Stop Process) Rebuild/Copyback progress (%) Vendor ID of the disk Product name of the disk Serial number of the disk WWN for the disk Disk firmware version Installation diagram for the front of the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Description

Status Code Error Code Capacity Type Speed (rpm) Usage RAID Group Motor Status Rebuild/Copyback Progress Vender ID Product ID Serial Number WWN Firmware Revision

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

56

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 4 Status Menu > 4.2 RAID Group Status

4.2

RAID Group Status


The [RAID Group Status] displays the status of RAID groups registered in the ETERNUS DX60/ DX80/DX90. The procedure to display the RAID group status is as follows:

Procedure

1 2

Click the [RAID Group Status] menu on the [Status] tab.


The [RAID Group Status] screen appears. The tree and list of the registered RAID groups are displayed.

Click the target RAID group icon in the tree or link in the "RAID Group List" to display detailed information.

Clicking the [Manual Refresh] or [Auto-refresh] button changes the status refresh mode. - [Manual Refresh] button The displayed information is not updated automatically (Manual Refresh mode). Click the [Refresh] button to display the latest information. - [Auto-refresh] button (Default) The displayed information is automatically updated every one minute (Auto-refresh mode). Clicking the [Refresh] button updates and displays the latest information.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

57

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 4 Status Menu > 4.2 RAID Group Status

The detailed information of the RAID group is displayed.

End of procedure

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

58

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 4 Status Menu > 4.3 Volume Status

4.3

Volume Status
The [Volume Status] displays the status of volumes registered in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/ DX90. The procedure to display the volume status is as follows:

Procedure

1 2

Click the [Volume Status] menu on the [Status] tab.


The [Volume Status] screen appears. The tree and list of the registered volumes are displayed.

Click the target volume icon in the tree or link in the "Volume List" to display detailed information.

Clicking the [Manual Refresh] or [Auto-refresh] button changes the status refresh mode. - [Manual Refresh] button The displayed information is not updated automatically (Manual Refresh mode). Click the [Refresh] button to display the latest information. - [Auto-refresh] button (Default) The displayed information is automatically updated every one minute (Auto-refresh mode). Clicking the [Refresh] button updates and displays the latest information.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

59

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 4 Status Menu > 4.3 Volume Status

Detailed information of the volume is displayed.

The volume number and the location of the volume in the RAID group may be different.

End of procedure

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

60

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 4 Status Menu > 4.4 Advanced Copy Status

4.4

Advanced Copy Status


The [Advanced Copy Status] displays the Advanced Copy related status. Refer to "5.4 Advanced Copy Management" (page 138) for details about Advanced Copy. The procedure to display the Advanced Copy status is as follows:

Procedure

Click the [Advanced Copy Status] menu on the [Status] tab.


The [Advanced Copy Status] screen appears. Current Advanced Copy status and list of sessions are displayed.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

61

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 4 Status Menu > 4.4 Advanced Copy Status

Content that is displayed in the "Advanced Copy Property" and "List of Advanced Copy Sessions" fields vary depending on the session type that is selected. The SnapOPC+ session type varies depending on the client information. - SnapOPC+ (by Host, all) A SnapOPC+ session that is created from the host (in which software such as Windows Volume Shadow Copy Service (VSS) and ETERNUS SF AdvancedCopy Manager (ACM) is installed). "VSS / ACS" is displayed as the client information. - Snap OPC+ (by LAN, oldest) A first generation SnapOPC+ session that is created from the GUI or the CLI. "GUI / CLI" is displayed as the client information. - SnapOPC+ (by LAN, all) A SnapOPC+ session that is created from the GUI or the CLI. "GUI / CLI" is displayed as the client information.

End of procedure

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

62

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 4 Status Menu > 4.5 Advanced Copy Path Status

4.5

Advanced Copy Path Status


The [Advanced Copy Path Status] displays the status of the copy path between local and remote devices created for Advanced Copy (REC). Refer to "5.4.7 Set Copy Path" (page 163) for detailed procedures on creating the copy path. The [Advanced Copy Path Status] menu is available when using an ETERNUS DX90 device. The procedure for displaying the Advanced Copy Path status is as follows:

Procedure

Click the [Advanced Copy Path Status] menu on the [Status] tab.
The [Advanced Copy Path Status] screen appears. Box IDs for the local and remote devices are displayed.

Clicking the [Manual Refresh] or [Auto-refresh] button changes the status refresh mode. - [Manual Refresh] button The displayed information is not updated automatically (Manual Refresh mode). Click the [Refresh] button to display the latest information. - [Auto-refresh] button (Default) The displayed information is automatically updated every one minute (Auto-refresh mode). Clicking the [Refresh] button updates and displays the latest information.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

63

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 4 Status Menu > 4.5 Advanced Copy Path Status

Select the desired remote device (Box ID) to check the status of the copy path between it and the local device.
The current Advanced copy path status is displayed.

End of procedure

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

64

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 4 Status Menu > 4.6 REC Buffer Status

4.6

REC Buffer Status


The [REC Buffer Status] function displays the REC buffer status. Refer to "5.4.10 Modify REC Buffer" (page 186) for detailed information about the REC buffer. The [REC Buffer Status] menu is available when using an ETERNUS DX90 device. The procedure for displaying the REC buffer status is as follows:

Procedure

Click the [REC Buffer Status] menu on the [Status] tab.


The [REC Buffer Status] screen appears. A list of REC buffer statuses is displayed.

Clicking the [Manual Refresh] or [Auto-refresh] button changes the status refresh mode. - [Manual Refresh] button The displayed information is not updated automatically (Manual Refresh mode). Click the [Refresh] button to display the latest information. - [Auto-refresh] button (Default) The displayed information is automatically updated every one minute (Auto-refresh mode). Clicking the [Refresh] button updates and displays the latest information.

End of procedure

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

65

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 5

Configuration

This chapter describes the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 configuration related menu. The following menus are provided: Configuration Wizard RAID Group Management Volume Management Advanced Copy Management

5.1

Configuration Wizard
The [Configuration Wizard] function provides series of settings required for ETERNUS DX60/ DX80/DX90 operation on the wizard screen. This function provides configurations in the following order: Create RAID Group, Create Volume, Define Host, Configure Affinity Group, and Define LUN Mapping. Also, adding volumes and changing settings for existing RAID groups are available. The value specified in each screen is immediately reflected to the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90. Even if the operation is canceled in the middle of it, the specified contents cannot be canceled. Perform "6.5.1 Set Port Parameters" (page 252) before starting the Configuration Wizard. When using the Host Affinity functions, make sure to "Enable" the Host Affinity setting of the port. Refer to "6.5 Host I/F Management" (page 250) for details about the host affinity

Create RAID Group


Create a RAID group (group of disks configuring RAID in the device) on this screen.

Create Volume
Create volumes (disk area in the RAID group) on this screen. The server recognizes the volume as units of RAID configuration.

Define Host
Register the server information to be connected to the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 via a port. Define host setting is not needed when the Host Affinity function is not used.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

66

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 5 Configuration > 5.1 Configuration Wizard

Configure Affinity Group


Creates the group of volumes to be recognized from the server (affinity group). Associate a server recognized Logical Unit Number (LUN) and volume numbers. The server recognizes the affinity group using the Host Affinity setting that allocates the affinity group to the server. Configure Affinity Group setting is not needed when the host affinity function is not used.

Define LUN Mapping


Specify the volume to be recognized from the server. - When the host affinity function is used Allocate the affinity group for each server connected to the port (Host Affinity setting). - When the host affinity function is not used Allocate the volume number managed in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 and server recognized LUN for each port (LUN mapping setting). Note that the value specified in the Configuration Wizard menu can be changed subsequently. Refer to the following sections for details.
Configuration Wizard Create RAID Group Create Volume Define Host Configure Affinity Group Define LUN Mapping
Refer

Refer to "5.2.1 Create RAID Group" (page 88) "5.3.1 Create Volume" (page 111) "6.5.2 Setup Host" (page 261) "5.3.10 Configure LUN Mapping" (page 130)

Refer

Refer

Refer

The following shows the procedure of configuration wizard:

Procedure

Click the [Configuration Wizard] menu on the [Easy Setup] tab.


The [Configuration Wizard] menu appears.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

67

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 5 Configuration > 5.1 Configuration Wizard

Click the [Start] button.

The Configuration Wizard starts. The [Create RAID Group] screen appears.

Set the following items, and click the [Next >] button.
Select the RAID group creating method from the following: Create RAID Group (Disks are assigned automatically) Creates a RAID group with an automatically selected disk. Create RAID Group (Disks are selected manually) Creates a RAID group with a user specified disk. Select existing RAID Group Creates volumes in an existing RAID group of ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90. When this item is selected, the "Select Target RAID Group" field is displayed. Select the RAID group to create volumes. Note that Step 4 and Step 5 of in the following procedure are skipped in this method. - Create RAID Group (Disks are assigned automatically)

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

68

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 5 Configuration > 5.1 Configuration Wizard

- Create RAID Group (Disks are selected manually)

- Select existing RAID Group

When "Create RAID Group (Disks are assigned automatically)" or "Create RAID Group (Disks are selected manually)" is selected: Move on to Step 4. When "Select existing RAID Group" is selected: Move on to Step 6.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

69

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 5 Configuration > 5.1 Configuration Wizard

Specify the following items, and click the [Create] button.


RAID Group Name Enter the RAID group name to be created. Between 1 and 16 alphanumeric characters, symbols (except ', (comma)' and '?', and '% used as the first letter'), and blanks can be used (required). RAID Level Select the RAID level. Only RAID levels that are configurable per the currently installed disks are displayed. Specifying disks manually narrows down the selectable RAID level options. Disk Capacity When selecting "Create RAID Group (Disks are assigned automatically)" in Step 3, select the disk capacity and number of disks to be used in the RAID group. Capacity is displayed only for disks that are actually installed and can configure the selected RAID group. The available number of disks varies depending on the specified RAID level. - RAID0: 2 16 - RAID1: 2 - RAID1+0: 4 32 (even number) - RAID5: 3 16 - RAID6: 5 16 - RAID5+0: 6 32 (even number) Assigned CM Select the assigned CM for the RAID group from "Automatic", "CM#0", or "CM#1". Normally, select the "Automatic". When the "Automatic" is selected, the control CM to be assigned varies according to the RAID group number. If the RAID group number is an even number, CM#0 is assigned to the new RAID group. For an odd number RAID group, CM#1 is assigned to the new RAID group. When the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 has only one CM, CM#1 cannot be specified as the Assigned CM. Select Disk When "Create RAID Group (Disks are selected manually)" is selected in Step 3, select the disks to be registered in the RAID Group (required). A RAID group name that is already registered in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 cannot be specified. It is not possible to select more than, or less than, the specified number of configuration disks for each RAID level. RAID0 has no data redundancy. RAID1, RAID1+0, RAID5, RAID6, and RAID5+0 are recommended for the RAID level. If disks of different capacities exist in a RAID group, the smallest capacity becomes the standard, and all other disks are regarded as having the same capacity as the smallest disk. In this case, the remaining disk space will NOT be used. SSD and SAS disks (SAS or Nearline SAS) cannot exist together in a single RAID group.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

70

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 5 Configuration > 5.1 Configuration Wizard

- Create RAID Group (Disks are assigned automatically)

- Create RAID Group (Disks are selected manually)

A confirmation screen appears.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

71

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 5 Configuration > 5.1 Configuration Wizard

Click the [OK] button.

A RAID Group is created. Move on to the [Create Volume] screen. Refer to "5.2.5 Logical Device Expansion" (page 98) or "5.2.8 Change CM Ownership" (page 109) to change the setting items after creating the RAID group.

Specify the following items, and click the [Create] button.


Volume Name Enter the volume name to be created. Between 1 and 16 alphanumeric characters, symbols (except ', (comma)' and '?', and '% used as the first letter'), and blanks can be used (required). Type Select the volume type (Open or SDV). Size (MB) Specify the volume capacity to be created in units of MB. Set the value between 24 to 8388607 (MB), or maximum capacity of the RAID group. When creating an SDV, the total SDV capacity (MB) and 0.1% of the copy source volume capacity is secured in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90. 0.1% of the copy source volume is the capacity used for the controlling information area in the SDV. Source Volume Size (MB) (SDV only) When SDV is selected for "Type", specify the total capacity of the copy source volume in units of MB. Set the value between 64 to 8388607 (MB). Encryption This item is displayed only when encryption mode is enabled. Select whether to "Enable" or "Disable" encryption mode for the new volume. An encrypted volume cannot be changed to a non-encrypted volume. Refer to "6.4.3 Setup Encryption Mode" (page 236) and "5.3.4 Encrypt Volume" (page 117) for details. Number of Volumes When creating multiple volumes with the same type and capacity, enter the number of volumes to be created. Created volume name is "specified volume name + running number starting from 0".

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

72

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 5 Configuration > 5.1 Configuration Wizard

A confirmation screen appears.

Click the [OK] button.

Volumes are created. Move on to the [Define Host] screen.

Click the [Add] button.


Define host setting is required when the host affinity function is used.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

73

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 5 Configuration > 5.1 Configuration Wizard

- For FC host

The "Add New FC Host" field is displayed. - For iSCSI host

The "Add New iSCSI Host" field is displayed.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

74

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 5 Configuration > 5.1 Configuration Wizard

- For SAS host

The "Add New SAS Host" field is displayed.

Specify the following items, and click the [Add] button.


- For FC host FC Port A list of FC ports that exist in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 is displayed. When a fibre channel switch is connected to the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90, settings between the fibre channel switch and server (FC host) must be completed in advance.

For ETERNUS DX90, only ports where the port mode is "CA" are displayed. Refer to "5.4.8 Modify Port Mode" (page 182) for detailed information about port modes. WWN Select the WWN, or directly input a WWN (required). 16 capital letters and numerals can be used. Name Input the FC Host Name (required). Between 1 and 16 alphanumeric characters, symbols (except ', (comma)' and '?', and '% used as the first letter'), and blanks can be used. Host Response Specify the host response for the target host (required). Refer to "ETERNUS DX Disk storage systems Server Connection Guide (Fibre Channel)" for details.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

75

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 5 Configuration > 5.1 Configuration Wizard

The target FC host is displayed in the "Registered FC Host List" field. To add multiple FC hosts, repeat the procedure for all the FC hosts to be added. - For iSCSI host iSCSI Port The list of iSCSI ports that exist in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80 is displayed. iSCSI Name Select the iSCSI Name, or directly input the iSCSI Name. Between 4 and 223 alphanumeric characters and symbols (required) can be used. In the following conditions, iSCSI Name cannot be obtained automatically: When the [Discover] button is inactivated When "Disable" is selected for the "iSNS server" in the "Set iSCSI Port Parameters" IP address Specify the IP address of the iSCSI host. When the IP address is not used for registering the host, this item is not required. Name Specify the target host (iSCSI port) name (required). Between 1 and 16 alphanumeric characters, symbols (except ', (comma)' and '?', and '% used as the first letter'), and blanks can be used. Host Response Specify the host response for the target host (required). Refer to "ETERNUS DX Disk storage systems Server Connection Guide (ISCSI)" for details. Alias Name Specify the alias name of the target host (iSCSI port). Up to 31 alphanumeric characters and symbols can be used. CHAP User ID Specify the user ID that accesses the target host (iSCSI port). Up to 255 alphanumeric characters and symbols can be used. It is not necessary to set this item if CHAP Authentication is not performed.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

76

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 5 Configuration > 5.1 Configuration Wizard

CHAP Password Specify the password to access the target host. Between 12 and 100 alphanumeric characters and symbols can be used. Make sure to set the user name and password in pairs.

Confirm CHAP Password Enter the same password as in the CHAP Password field.

The target iSCSI host is displayed in the "Registered iSCSI Host List" field. To add multiple iSCSI hosts, repeat the procedure for all the iSCSI hosts to be added. - For SAS host SAS Port The list of SAS ports that exist in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80 is displayed. SAS Address Select the SAS address, or directly input a SAS address (required). 16 capital letters and numerals can be used. Name Specify the target host (SAS port) name (required). Between 1 and 16 alphanumeric characters, symbols (except ', (comma)' and '?', and '% used as the first letter'), and blanks can be used. Host Response Specify the host response for the target host (required). Refer to "ETERNUS DX Disk storage systems Server Connection Guide (SAS)" for details.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

77

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 5 Configuration > 5.1 Configuration Wizard

The target SAS host is displayed in the "Registered SAS Host List" field. To add multiple SAS hosts, repeat the procedure for all the SAS hosts to be added.

10 When registering hosts completes, click the [Done] button.


- For FC host

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

78

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 5 Configuration > 5.1 Configuration Wizard

- For iSCSI host

- For SAS host

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

79

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 5 Configuration > 5.1 Configuration Wizard

11 Click the [Next >] button.


- For FC host

- For iSCSI host

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

80

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 5 Configuration > 5.1 Configuration Wizard

- For SAS host

A confirmation screen appears.

12 Click the [OK] button.

The specified host setting is registered. Move on to the [Configure Affinity Group] screen.

13 Click the [Create] button.


Creating affinity group is required when using the host affinity function. When the host affinity function is not used, click the [Next >] button to move on to the "Configure LUN Mapping" setting menu. Also, this setting is not required when using an existing affinity group (displayed in the "List of Affinity Group(s)" field). When using the existing affinity group, select the target group from the "List of Affinity Group(s)" field and click the [Edit] button.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

81

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 5 Configuration > 5.1 Configuration Wizard

The "Affinity Group Setting" and "Define LUN Mapping" fields are displayed.

14 Enter the affinity group name and specify a volume number corresponding to the
LUN, and click the [Set] button.
Specify the affinity group name. Between 1 and 16 alphanumeric characters, symbols (except ', (comma)' and '?', and '% used as the first letter'), and blanks can be used. A LUN is displayed as a decimal number. Set the volume number as a decimal number.

A confirmation screen appears.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

82

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 5 Configuration > 5.1 Configuration Wizard

15 Click the [OK] button.

16 Click the [Next >] button.

Move on to the [Define LUN Mapping] screen.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

83

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 5 Configuration > 5.1 Configuration Wizard

17 Select the port that is connected to the target server from the "Port List" field.
For ETERNUS DX90, only ports where the port mode is "CA" are displayed. Refer to "5.4.8 Modify Port Mode" (page 182) for detailed information about port modes. When using the Host Affinity function:

(1)Click the [Edit] button.

The "Host Affinity Setting" field is displayed.

(2)Assign the affinity group to the server, and click the [Set] button.

A confirmation screen appears.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

84

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 5 Configuration > 5.1 Configuration Wizard

(3)Click the [OK] button.

Returns to the "Port List" screen.

When the Host Affinity function is not used:

(1)Click the [Edit] button.


Click the [Copy] button to copy the LUN mapping information from the other port.

The [Define LUN Mapping] field is displayed.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

85

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 5 Configuration > 5.1 Configuration Wizard

(2)Adjust the LUN mapping information for the target port, and click the [Set] button.

A confirmation screen appears.

(3)Click the [OK] button.

Returns to the "Port List" screen.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

86

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 5 Configuration > 5.1 Configuration Wizard

18 Click the [Finish] button.


A confirmation screen appears.

19 Click the [OK] button.

The Configuration Wizard screen is closed.

End of procedure

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

87

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 5 Configuration > 5.2 RAID Group Management

5.2

RAID Group Management


The following settings are available for RAID group management. Create/Delete RAID Group Assign/Release Hot Spare Logical Device Expansion Set RAID Group name Set Eco-mode Schedule Change CM Ownership

5.2.1

Create RAID Group


When changing the RAID settings or adding extra disks, you need to create new RAID groups. You can confirm the groups that are created from the [RAID Group Status] menu on the [Status] tab.

Number of disks that can be set for each RAID level


The number of disks that can be set for each RAID level is as follows. The available number of disks varies according to ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90.
RAID level RAID0 RAID1 RAID1+0 RAID5 RAID6 RAID5+0 Number of disks that can be created ETERNUS DX60 2 16 2 4 24 3 16 5 16 (3 12) 2 ETERNUS DX80/DX90 2 16 2 4 32 3 16 5 16 (3 12) 2 Recommended number of disks 2(1D+1M) 4(2D+2M), 6(3D+3M), 8(4D+4M), 10(5D+5M) 3(2D+1P), 4(3D+1P), 5(4D+1P), 6(5D+1P) 5(3D+2P), 6(4D+2P), 7(5D+2P) 3(2D+1P) 2, 4(3D+1P) 2, 5(4D+1P) 2, 6(5D+1P) 2

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

88

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 5 Configuration > 5.2 RAID Group Management

The maximum number of RAID groups that can be set to each RAID level
The maximum number of RAID groups that can be created is 12 for the ETERNUS DX60, and 60 for the ETERNUS DX80/DX90. The maximum number of RAID groups that can be set for each RAID level is as follows. The available number of RAID groups varies according to each device.
RAID level RAID0 RAID1 RAID1+0 RAID5 RAID6 RAID5+0 Number of RAID groups that can be created ETERNUS DX60 12 12 6 8 4 4 ETERNUS DX80/DX90 60 60 30 40 24 20

The maximum number of volumes that can be set


The maximum number of volumes that can be set for each RAID group and device is as follows. The available number of volumes varies according to each device.
Device name ETERNUS DX60 ETERNUS DX80/DX90 per RAID group Up to 128 Up to 128 per device Up to 512 Up to 1024

RAID groups can be created when the disk satisfies all the following conditions: - The disk is not one that configures a RAID group - The disk is not specified as a hot spare - The disk status is "Available" or "Present" In the following conditions, RAID groups cannot be created: - There are no disks to configure the RAID group - When the maximum number of RAID groups has already been created Creating RAID groups is required before creating volumes.

The procedure to create a RAID group is as follows:

Procedure

Click the [Create RAID Group] under the [RAID Group Management] menu on the [Volume Settings] tab.
The [Create RAID Group] screen appears.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

89

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 5 Configuration > 5.2 RAID Group Management

Specify the following items, and click the [Next >] button.
Select one of the following items: Create RAID Group (Disks are assigned automatically) Creates a RAID group with automatically selected disks. Create RAID Group (Disks are selected manually) Creates a RAID group with user specified disks. - Create RAID Group (Disks are assigned automatically)

- Create RAID Group (Disks are selected manually)

The "New RAID Group" field is displayed.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

90

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 5 Configuration > 5.2 RAID Group Management

Specify the following items, and click the [Create] button.


RAID Group Name Enter the RAID group name to be created. Between 1 and 16 alphanumeric characters, symbols (except ', (comma)' and '?', and '% used as the first letter'), and blanks can be used. RAID Level Select the RAID level. Only the configurable RAID level depending on the currently installed disks are displayed. When specifying the disks manually, selectable RAID level options are narrowed down. Disk Capacity When selecting "Create RAID Group (Disks are assigned automatically)" in Step 2, select the disk capacity and number of disks to be used in the RAID group. Capacity is displayed only for the disks that are actually installed and can create the selected RAID group. Available number of disks varies depending on the specified RAID level. - RAID0: 2 16 - RAID1: 2 - RAID1+0: 4 32 (even number) - RAID5: 3 16 - RAID6: 5 16 - RAID5+0: 6 32 (even number) Assigned CM Select the assigned CM for the RAID group from "Automatic", "CM#0", or "CM#1". Normally, select the "Automatic". When the "Automatic" is selected, the control CM to be assigned varies according to the RAID group number. If the RAID group number is an even number, CM#0 is assigned to the new RAID group. For an odd number RAID group, CM#1 is assigned to the new RAID group. When the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 has only one CM, CM#1 cannot be specified as the Assigned CM. Select Disk When "Create RAID Group (Disks are selected manually)" is selected in Step 2, select the disks to be registered in the RAID Group (required). A RAID group name that is already registered in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 cannot be specified. It is not possible to select more than, or less than, the specified number of configuration disks for each RAID level. RAID0 has no data redundancy. RAID1, RAID1+0, RAID5, RAID6, and RAID5+0 are recommended for the RAID level. If disks of different capacities exist in a RAID group, the smallest capacity becomes the standard, and all other disks are regarded as having the same capacity as the smallest disk. In this case, the remaining disk space will NOT be used. SSD and SAS disks (SAS or Nearline SAS) cannot exist together in a single RAID group.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

91

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 5 Configuration > 5.2 RAID Group Management

- Create RAID Group (Disks are assigned automatically)

- Create RAID Group (Disks are selected manually)

A confirmation screen appears.

Click the [OK] button.

The RAID group is created.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

92

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 5 Configuration > 5.2 RAID Group Management

Refer to "5.2.5 Logical Device Expansion" (page 98) or "5.2.8 Change CM Ownership" (page 109) to change the setting items after creating the RAID group.

End of procedure

5.2.2

Delete RAID Group


The [Delete RAID Group] function deletes the registered RAID groups. When a RAID group is deleted, the status of the disks that configured the RAID group change to data disks that are not used by any RAID group. RAID groups that have volumes registered cannot be deleted. All volumes must be deleted before deleting a RAID group. Refer to "5.3.2 Delete Volume" (page 114) for procedure to delete volumes. The procedure to delete RAID group is as follows:

Procedure

1 2

Click the [Delete RAID Group] under the [RAID Group Management] menu on the [Volume Settings] tab.
The [Delete RAID Group] function screen appears.

Select the target RAID group, and click the [Delete] button.

A confirmation screen appears.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

93

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 5 Configuration > 5.2 RAID Group Management

Click the [OK] button.

The selected RAID group is deleted.

End of procedure

5.2.3

Assign Hot Spare


The [Assign Hot Spare] function registers a hot spare, which enables automatic data copy (Rebuild) in the background when a disk failure occurs. Hot spare is a disk that is available as a substitute for a failed disk. There are two types of hot spare as follows: Global Hot Spare Hot spare used by all the RAID groups Dedicated Hot Spare Hot spare used by the dedicated RAID group (one specific RAID group) A "Global Hot Spare" is a shared hot spare prepared in case a failure occurs in a RAID group. When preparing hot spares for a specific RAID group, register them as "Dedicated Hot Spare". Note the following items when adding a hot spare: A system disk (Slot#0 to Slot#1 of the controller enclosure) cannot be specified as a hot spare. A hot spare that substitutes for a failed disk must have the same or a larger capacity than the data disk. If the hot spare capacity is smaller than the data disk, the disk does not work as the hot spare. Generally, a hot spare can be installed in any slot, with the exception of system disk installation locations. When switching in a hot spare for a failed disk, a hot spare with the same capacity as the failed disk will be used first. If such a hot spare does not exist, a large capacity hot spare will be used (when there are multiple numbers of such disks, the smallest capacity hot spare among them is used). Note that a Global Hot Spare is used in this situation. When you replace a failed disk, the data is copied back from the hot spare that is substituting for the failed disk, and the hot spare disk then returns to a spare disk. When a mix of SAS disks, Nearline SAS disks, and SSDs are installed together in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90, hot spare of each type is required. Install the hot spare that has the same capacity as the largest capacity disks of the same type installed in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/ DX90.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

94

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 5 Configuration > 5.2 RAID Group Management

The procedure to assign a hot spare is as follows:

Procedure

1 2

Click the [Assign Hot Spare] under the [RAID Group Management] menu on the [Volume Settings] tab.
The [Assign Hot Spare] screen appears.

Specify the following items, and click the [Assign] button.


Hot Spare Type Select from the following items: - Global Hot Spare Global hot spare is shared by any RAID group in the device. - Dedicated Hot Spare Dedicated hot spare is used by specified RAID group. Select an existing RAID Group When selecting the "Dedicated Hot Spare", specify the target RAID group. Select Disk Select the disk to be used as hot spare. - When adding "Global Hot Spare"

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

95

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 5 Configuration > 5.2 RAID Group Management

- When adding "Dedicated Hot Spare"

A confirmation screen appears.

Click the [OK] button.

The hot spare is added.

End of procedure

5.2.4

Release Hot Spare


The [Release Hot Spare] function deletes a registered hot spare. A released disk can be used as a data disk after it is registered in a RAID group. Hot spare cannot be deleted in the following conditions: When the usage of the hot spare is other than "Spare" When the status of the hot spare is other than "Present" When one of the following operations is in progress: - Registering controller firmware - Applying controller firmware - Registering disk firmware - Applying disk firmware - During the RAID group diagnosis - During the disk diagnosis

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

96

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 5 Configuration > 5.2 RAID Group Management

The procedure to delete hot spare is as follows:

Procedure

1 2

Click the [Release Hot Spare] under the [RAID Group Management] menu on the [Volume Settings] tab.
The [Release Hot Spare] screen appears.

Specify the following items, and click the [Release] button.


Hot Spare Type Select one of the following as a condition of the hot spare to be released. - Global Hot Spare Global hot spare is shared by any RAID group in the device. - Dedicated Hot Spare Dedicated hot spare is used by a specified RAID group. Criteria for Target Disk This field is displayed when selecting the "Dedicated Hot Spare". If the "Specify RAID Group" checkbox is selected, the target RAID group can be specified. Select Disk Select the disk to be released as hot spare. - When releasing "Global Hot Spare"

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

97

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 5 Configuration > 5.2 RAID Group Management

- When releasing "Dedicated Hot Spare"

A confirmation screen appears.

Click the [OK] button.

The selected hot spare is deleted.

End of procedure

5.2.5

Logical Device Expansion


The [Logical Device Expansion] function expands the capacity of an existing RAID group by adding new disks or changing RAID levels. Normally, volume expansion requires adding RAID groups. This method requires multiple disks to be installed (used). However, this function can add disks to the existing RAID group in units of one disk. This enables capacity expansion of RAID groups with smaller number of disk expansion. This function can be performed with taking over data in the disks.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

98

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 5 Configuration > 5.2 RAID Group Management

Disks that are a different type (SAS/SSD) than the disks that configure the RAID group cannot be added. Logical Device Expansion is not available in the following conditions: - RAID groups are not in normal status (Rebuilding, Copybacking, or using hot spare etc.) - When another Logical Device Expansion is being performed - When the disk diagnosis or RAID group diagnosis is in progress - When changing CM ownership (assigned CM) of the target RAID group - When the volume encryption, formatting volume, or LUN concatenation is in progress in the target RAID group - When the target RAID level or changed RAID level is RAID5+0 - Changing RAID level to RAID0 Note that existing volume size is not changed even if the RAID level is changed or capacity is expanded. The procedure for Logical Device Expansion is as follows:

Procedure

1 2

Click the [Logical Device Expansion] under the [RAID Group Management] menu on the [Volume Settings] tab.
The [Logical Device Expansion] screen appears.

Select the target RAID group, and click the [Next >] button.

The "Modify RAID Group Configuration" screen appears.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

99

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 5 Configuration > 5.2 RAID Group Management

Specify the following items, and click the [Next >] button.
RAID Level Select (change) the RAID level. Only for adding disks, changing RAID level is not required.

Select Disk Select (add) disks according to the new RAID level.

A confirmation screen appears.

Click the [Start] button.

A confirmation screen appears.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

100

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 5 Configuration > 5.2 RAID Group Management

Click the [OK] button.

Logical Device Expansion is performed.

End of procedure

5.2.6

Set RAID Group Name


The [Set RAID Group Name] function can change the existing RAID group name. The procedure to change RAID group name is as follows:

Procedure

1 2

Click the [Set RAID Group Name] under the [RAID Group Management] menu on the [Volume Settings] tab.
The [Set RAID Group Name] screen appears.

Change the target RAID group name, and click the [Set] button.
Specify a new RAID group name. Between 1 and 16 alphanumeric characters, symbols (except ', (comma)' and '?', and '% used as the first letter'), and blanks can be used. RAID group name that is already registered in the ETERNUS DX60/ DX80/DX90 cannot be specified.

A confirmation screen appears.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

101

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 5 Configuration > 5.2 RAID Group Management

Click the [OK] button.

The RAID group name is changed.

End of procedure

5.2.7

Set Eco-mode Schedule


The [Set Eco-mode Schedule] provides the following functions:

Eco-mode General Setting


Enables or disables the Eco-mode setting for ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90.

Eco-mode Schedule Setting


Specifies the disk operating time (term for activating disk motor constantly) as an Eco-mode schedule.

Apply Eco-mode Schedule


Applies the created Eco-mode schedule for each RAID group. Disk operation time varies depending on the Eco-mode schedule settings and disk access. A disk is spun up even if it is outside of disk operation time in the following conditions: If an access occurs while a motor is stopped The disk is immediately spun up and access proceeds normally after one to three minutes. If a disk is activated more than a set amount of times in a day A state of increased access frequency is assumed and the Eco-mode will cease stopping the disk motor. The following shows examples: Operation schedule is set as 9:00 to 21:00, the allowed number of activations is one time, and there are no accesses outside of the scheduled period
1:00 9:00 21:00 0:00

Stopped

Scheduled Operation

Stopped

Drive Motor Running First activation Motor is spun up 30 minutes before start of operating time Motor is stopped 30 minutes after end of operating time

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

102

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 5 Configuration > 5.2 RAID Group Management

Operation schedule is set as 9:00 to 21:00, the allowed number of activations is one time, and there are accesses outside of the scheduled period
No. of activations reset to 0 at 0:00 Access 1:00 9:00 21:00 Access finishes 0:00

Scheduled Operation

Drive Motors Running

Drive Motors Running First activation: Count: 1 Motors spun up 30 minutes before start of scheduled time Second activation: Count: 2

Drive Motors Running

Access OK in 1 - 3 minutes Motors stopped 30 minutes after end of scheduled time

Reset: Count: 0

Disk motors left running after access has finished because this was the 2nd activation

To perform schedule operations using this function, the Eco-mode setting for the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 must be enabled. Eco-mode is not available for the following disks. - System disks - Hot spares - SSD - Disks in a RAID group the satisfies the following conditions: A RAID group including system disks A RAID group where no volume is registered A RAID group where SDPVs are registered If any of the following conditions occur during the Eco-mode scheduled time, the disk motor is not inactivated. Note that the Eco-mode schedule will be re-enabled when these conditions have finished. - Target RAID group or volume status is other than "Available" - Performing functions that changes RAID group or volume configuration - During maintenance - During host access - During disk or RAID group diagnosis - Exporting G-List - Changing assigned CM for RAID group - Module error related to access path to the controller modules and disks is detected When setting the Eco-mode for the Advanced Copy source/destination, it is necessary to schedule a disk motor to be activated while performing Advanced Copy. If it is difficult to schedule, do not set the Eco-mode to the copy source/destination. If the disks are inactivated, the Advanced Copy cannot be executed.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

103

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 5 Configuration > 5.2 RAID Group Management

REC does not require that a disk motor be scheduled for activation while performing REC. If the disk motor was inactivated when REC started, ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 activates the disk motor automatically and starts the copy operation. The target disks where Eco-mode schedule can be set are SAS disks and Nearline SAS disks. SSDs are not available for this function.

Eco-mode General Setting


Enables or disables the Eco-mode setting for ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90. The procedure for Eco-mode General Setting is as follows:

Procedure

1 2

Click the [Set Eco-mode Schedule] under the [RAID Group Management] menu on the [Volume Settings] tab.
The [Set Eco-mode Schedule] screen appears.

Specify the following items, and click the [Set] button.


Eco-mode Select whether to "Enable" or "Disable" the Eco-mode for ETERNUS DX60/DX80/ DX90.

A confirmation screen appears.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

104

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 5 Configuration > 5.2 RAID Group Management

Click the [OK] button.

Eco-mode commonness setting is applied.

End of procedure

Eco-mode Schedule Setting


Specify the disk operation time as an Eco-mode schedule. Up to 64 Eco-mode schedules can be created. The procedure to create the Eco-mode schedule is as follows:

Procedure

1 2 3

Click the [Set Eco-mode Schedule] under the [RAID Group Management] menu on the [Volume Settings] tab.
The [Set Eco-mode Schedule] screen appears.

Click the "Schedule" icon from the tree in the left of the screen.
The "Schedule" field is displayed.

Click the [Create] button.

The setting fields for new schedule is displayed.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

105

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 5 Configuration > 5.2 RAID Group Management

When changing or deleting the Eco-mode schedules, select the target event in the "Schedule" field or the tree in the left of the screen, and click the [Set] or [Delete] button.

Set the following items.


Schedule Name Specify the schedule name. Between 1 and 16 alphanumeric characters, symbols (except ', (comma)' and '?', and '% used as the first letter'), and blanks can be used. Event List Set the schedule event in this field. Click the [Add] button. The "Set Event" field is displayed. Up to eight events per schedule can be created. When changing the event details, select the target event, and click the [Edit] button. When deleting the event, select the target event(s) to be deleted (multiple selections can be made), and click the [Delete] button. Clicking the [Delete All] button deletes all the specified events in the schedule. Set Event Specify the following items, and click the [Apply] button. - Event Type Select one of the following items: everyday Every week Specific days Specific week Also, enter a Month (when selecting "Every week" or "Specific week"), Period (when selecting other than "everyday"), and start/end time of the disk activation.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

106

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 5 Configuration > 5.2 RAID Group Management

Click the [Set] button.

A confirmation screen appears.

Click the [OK] button.

The new Eco-mode schedule setting is started.

End of procedure

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

107

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 5 Configuration > 5.2 RAID Group Management

Apply Eco-mode Schedule


This function applies the Eco-mode schedule to the RAID group. The procedure to apply the Eco-mode schedule is as follows:

Procedure

1 2 3

Click the [Set Eco-mode Schedule] under the [RAID Group Management] menu on the [Volume Settings] tab.
The [Set Eco-mode Schedule] screen appears.

Click the "RAID Groups" icon from the tree in the left of the screen.
The "Assign RAID Groups" field is displayed.

Specify the following items, and click the [Set] button.


Schedule Name Select the Eco-mode schedule to be applied When disabling the Eco-mode schedule for the relevant RAID group, select "Disable". When external software controls the Eco-mode, "External" is displayed. Action Select "ON" to enable the Eco-mode schedule specified in "Schedule Name" in the target RAID group. Select "OFF" to disable the Eco-mode schedule.

A confirmation screen appears.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

108

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 5 Configuration > 5.2 RAID Group Management

Click the [OK] button.

The Eco-mode schedule is applied for the RAID groups.

End of procedure

5.2.8

Change CM Ownership
The [Change CM Ownership] function changes the assigned CM (CM ownership) specified when creating the RAID group. Normally, CM ownership is automatically allocated. If the load is not balanced evenly between CMs, CM ownership can be manually allocated in order to balance the load. When the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 has only one CM, the assigned CM cannot be changed.

This function cannot be used in the following conditions: - No RAID groups are registered in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 - Logical Device Expansion is in progress - Pinned data exists in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 - RAID migration is in progress - A REC buffer whose usage is not set as "Unused" is registered - RAID group status is other than "Available" - RAID group is blocked - Volumes which are being encrypted exist - Volumes which are being formatted exist During CM ownership change, the device status is changed from Write Back mode to Write Through mode. Consider the workload when using this function.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

109

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 5 Configuration > 5.2 RAID Group Management

The procedure to change RAID group assigned CM is as follows:

Procedure

1 2

Click the [Change CM Ownership] under the [RAID Group Management] menu on the [Volume Settings] tab.
The [Change CM Ownership] screen appears.

Specify the following items, and click the [Change] button.


Select Automatic or Manual assignment of ownership. Select the method for assigning the CM from "Auto" or "Manual". If changing the current setting, a confirmation screen appears. RAID Group List When selecting the "Manual" for "Select Automatic or Manual assignment of ownership." field, specify the assigned CM for the RAID group.

A confirmation screen appears.

Click the [OK] button.

The assigned CM is changed.

End of procedure

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

110

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 5 Configuration > 5.3 Volume Management

5.3

Volume Management
The following settings are available as the volume management. Create/Delete Volume Format Volume Encrypt Volume LUN Concatenation RAID Migration Initialize Snap Data Volume Release Reservation Set Volume Name Configure LUN Mapping

5.3.1

Create Volume
The [Create Volume] function creates the volumes in the existing RAID group. Open or Snap Data Volume (SDV) can be created with this function. After completing the volume creation, the new volumes are formatted automatically. Volumes can be accessed from the host when created in the RAID group and LUN mapped.

The maximum number of volumes that can be registered


The following table shows the maximum number of volumes can be created for each device.
Device Type ETERNUS DX60 ETERNUS DX80/DX90 per RAID group Up to 128 Up to 128 per Device Up to 512 Up to 1024

When the maximum number of volumes has already been created in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90, more volumes cannot be created. In this case, to create a new volume, first delete volumes using the "5.3.2 Delete Volume" (page 114) function, and then try creating a new volume again. A volume is allocated to uninterrupted free space in the order of creation. If an area with the necessary capacity cannot be acquired from the free space available, use the "5.3.5 LUN Concatenation" (page 119) function to concatenate multiple spaces into a volume. SDV is the Snap Data Volume that is required for SnapOPC+. Refer to "5.4.2 Manage Copy Session" (page 151) for details about SnapOPC+.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

111

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 5 Configuration > 5.3 Volume Management

The procedure to create a volume is as follows:

Procedure

1 2

Click the [Create Volume] under the [Volume Management] menu on the [Volume Settings] tab.
The [Create Volume] screen appears.

Select the RAID group where the volumes are created from the tree in the left of the screen, or RAID Group List.

The detailed information of the selected RAID group is displayed.

Specify the following items, and click the [Create] button.


Volume Name Specify the volume name. Between 1 and 16 alphanumeric characters, symbols (except ', (comma)' and '?', and '% used as the first letter'), and blanks can be used. Type Select the volume type (Open or SDV). Capacity (MB) Specify the volume capacity to be created in units of MB. Set the value between 24 to 8388607 (MB), or the maximum capacity of the RAID group. When creating an SDV, the total SDV capacity (MB) and 0.1% of the copy source volume capacity is secured in the ETERNUS DX60/ DX80/DX90. 0.1% of the copy source volume is the capacity used for the controlling information area in the SDV. Source Volume Capacity (MB) (SDV only) Specify the total capacity of the copy source for SDV in units of MB. Set the value between 64 to 8388607 (MB).

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

112

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 5 Configuration > 5.3 Volume Management

Encryption Select whether to "Enable" or "Disable" encryption mode for the new volume. An encrypted volume cannot be changed to non-encrypted volumes. Refer to "5.3.4 Encrypt Volume" (page 117) for details. Number of Volumes When creating multiple volumes of the same type and capacity, set the number of volumes to be created. A created volume name is "specified volume name + running number starting from 0".

A confirmation screen appears.

Click the [OK] button.

The volumes are created.

End of procedure

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

113

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 5 Configuration > 5.3 Volume Management

5.3.2

Delete Volume
The [Delete Volume] function deletes the volumes in the RAID group. Make sure to backup any necessary data before proceeding. The following volumes cannot be deleted. - Volumes that are allocated to a Host Affinity or mapped LUN. - Volumes during RAID migration. - Copy source and destination volumes during Advanced Copy session. A volume is allocated to uninterrupted free space in order of creation. When a volume is deleted, the space where the volume existed becomes free space. By repeating creation and deletion of volumes, free space may be dispersed in the RAID group. Up to 128 volumes can be deleted at once. The procedure to delete a volume is as follows:

Procedure

1 2

Click the [Delete Volume] under the [Volume Management] menu on the [Volume Settings] tab.
The [Delete Volume] screen appears.

Select the volume to be deleted from the "Volume List" field (multiple selections can be made), and click the [Delete] button.

A confirmation screen appears.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

114

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 5 Configuration > 5.3 Volume Management

Click the [OK] button.

The selected volumes are deleted.

End of procedure

5.3.3

Format Volume
The [Format Volume] function is used to format (clear data in) the selected volume. If selecting and formatting a volume that is in use, the data stored in the volume will be deleted. For a newly created volume, formatting with this function is not required. Newly created volumes are formatted automatically. When disk diagnosis or RAID group diagnosis are in progress, this function cannot be performed. The following volumes cannot be formatted. - Volumes with a status other than "Readying" or "Available" - Volumes in the RAID group during Logical Device Expansion - Volumes for which Advanced Copy is being performed - Volumes during RAID migration When a volume is being formatted, some settings and functions cannot be performed. When canceling the volume format, delete the target volume. Progress of formatting can be checked from the [Volume Status] menu on the [Status] tab. The procedure to format a volume is as follows:

Procedure

Click the [Format Volume] under the [Volume Management] menu on the [Volume Settings] tab.
The [Format Volume] screen appears.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

115

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 5 Configuration > 5.3 Volume Management

Select the volume to be formatted from the tree in the left of the screen, or "Volume List" field (multiple selections can be made), and click the [Format] button.

A confirmation screen appears.

Click the [OK] button.

The selected volumes are formatted.

End of procedure

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

116

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 5 Configuration > 5.3 Volume Management

5.3.4

Encrypt Volume
The [Encrypt Volume] function encrypts the data in the disks to prevent the data leakage caused by theft or loss when removing disks. When encrypting volumes, enable the encryption mode using the "6.4.3 Setup Encryption Mode" (page 236) function. However, when the "Setup Encryption Mode" is not displayed in the menu, the encryption function is not available. However, when the encryption function is not available, the "Setup Encryption Mode" is not displayed in the menu. This function prevents data leakage from removal of disks. Therefore, when accessing from the server, data in the disks is not encrypted. Note that this function cannot prevent data leakage by server access. Once a volume has been encrypted, it cannot be changed back to a non-encrypted volume. Canceling volume encryption is not possible. This function cannot be used under the following conditions: - Encryption mode is not set (refer to "6.4.3 Setup Encryption Mode" (page 236)) - A warning status component exists in the controller enclosure - There is no volume to be encrypted Volumes in the following conditions cannot be selected as an encryption target volume (not displayed in the Volume List). - Volumes which are not in normal status (Rebuilding/Copybacking, etc.) - Volumes which are being formatted - Volumes in RAID migration operation - Volumes in a RAID group in which Logical Device Expansion is being executed - Volumes which are already encrypted - Volumes which are being encrypted When encrypting Advanced Copy target volumes, both the copy source and copy destination volumes must be encrypted. The following performance may be degraded for encrypted volumes compared with non-encrypted volumes. - Access to the encrypted volumes - Copy transfer of encrypted volumes The progress of an encryption operation can be checked from [Volume Status] menu on the [Status] tab screen.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

117

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 5 Configuration > 5.3 Volume Management

The procedure to encrypt a volume is as follows:

Procedure

1 2

Click the [Encrypt Volume] under the [Volume Management] menu on the [Volume Settings] tab.
The [Encrypt Volume] screen appears.

Select the volume to be encrypted from the "Volume List" field (multiple selections can be made), and click the [Encrypt] button.

A confirmation screen appears.

Click the [OK] button.

The selected volume is encrypted.

End of procedure

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

118

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 5 Configuration > 5.3 Volume Management

5.3.5

LUN Concatenation
LUN concatenation adds new space for volumes and expands the volume capacity that can be used from the server. This function enables the use of free area in the RAID group, and solves capacity shortages. This function obtains the area to be used for capacity expansion from unused areas in an existing RAID group. LUN concatenation creates a new volume with the obtained area, and concatenates these volumes to be used as a large capacity volume. Concatenation of multiple free areas from different RAID groups is possible. Also, concatenation is possible even if the RAID levels of the groups are different. Up to 16 volumes can be concatenated. The maximum volume capacity after concatenation is 32TB.

Conditions of the volumes to be concatenated


The volume type must be "Open" (Open volume) The volume status must be "Available" The volume capacity must be 1024MB or larger Cannot be concatenated during RAID Migration Cannot be concatenated when there is an Advanced Copy session The RAID group to which the volume belongs is not in the Logical Device Expansion process

Conditions of RAID groups to obtain unused area


The RAID Group status must be "Available" A RAID group with less than 128 volumes registered A RAID group must not be blocked Concatenation of volumes is not possible in RAID groups configured with disks of different types (SAS/SSD). When expanding the existing volume capacity using the [LUN Concatenation] function, the server is required to recognize the expanded volume capacity after the concatenation. A new concatenated volume is automatically formatted. The progress of formatting may be checked in the [Volume Status] screen on the [Status] tab. The procedure for LUN Concatenation is as follows:

Procedure

Click the [LUN Concatenation] under the [Volume Management] menu on the [Volume Settings] tab.
The [LUN Concatenation] screen appears.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

119

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 5 Configuration > 5.3 Volume Management

Select the volume to be concatenated from the tree in the left of the screen, or Volume List.

Detailed information of the target volume is displayed.

Click the [Next >] button.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

120

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 5 Configuration > 5.3 Volume Management

Set the following items, and click the [Concatenation] button.


RAID Group Select the existing RAID group where the concatenation volume is obtained. Capacity (MB) Specify the capacity of concatenation volume, and click the [Add] button. Concatenation volume is added in the "Volume Information" field.

A confirmation screen appears.

Click the [OK] button.

LUN concatenation is started.

End of procedure

5.3.6

RAID Migration
This function migrates a volume in a RAID group to a free area in another RAID group. Setting (expanding) the volume capacity is also available. This function enables load balancing of host access. Creation and format of new volumes and host interface establishment are automatically performed. Because data in the volume will be moved to a new volume, users are allowed to access the data anytime without being affected by the migration. After the RAID migration is completed, the migration source volume is deleted.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

121

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 5 Configuration > 5.3 Volume Management

Conditions of the migration source volume


The volume type must be "Open" (Open volume) The volume status must be "Available" Cannot be migrated while formatting Cannot be migrated during RAID Migration Cannot be migrated during Advanced Copy Cannot be migrated during encryption A concatenated volume cannot be migrated The RAID group to which the volume belongs is not in the Logical Device Expansion process. The total capacity of the Open Volume to be migrated and the capacity of the volumes being migrated must not exceed 8TB

Conditions of the migration destination RAID group


The number of volumes in the RAID group must be less than 128 The status of the RAID group must be "Available" or "Present" A RAID group must not be blocked The free area (sequential space) for the RAID group must be equal to or larger than the migration source volume capacity The migration destination is not in the same RAID group as the migration source (migration in the same RAID group is not available) The RAID group to which the volume belongs is not in the Logical Device Expansion process.

Conditions of the RAID migration session


Up to 32 RAID migration sessions can be migrated at the same time Up to 8TB capacity of RAID migration can be executed at the same time

The maximum number of volumes that can be registered


RAID Migration creates a new volume. Refer to table "The maximum number of volumes that can be registered" (page 111) in "5.3.1 Create Volume" (page 111) for the maximum number of volumes that can be created for ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90. The procedure for RAID migration is as follows:

Procedure

Click the [RAID Migration] under the [Volume Management] menu on the [Volume Settings] tab.
The [RAID Migration] screen appears.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

122

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 5 Configuration > 5.3 Volume Management

Select the migration source volume, and click the [Next >] button.

The "Select Destination RAID Group for the migrated Volume" setting field is displayed.

Select the migration destination RAID group, and click the [Next >] button.

The "Input Volume Capacity" setting field is displayed.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

123

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 5 Configuration > 5.3 Volume Management

Input the new volume capacity (in MB), and click the [Next >] button.
Specifying (Expanding) the target volume capacity is available at the RAID migration. Added capacity is created as a new volume in the migration destination RAID group.

Click the [Migration] button.

A confirmation screen appears.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

124

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 5 Configuration > 5.3 Volume Management

Click the [OK] button.

The RAID migration process is started. If the RAID migration process cannot be continued during the operation, the process is canceled and the RAID migration destination volume is deleted.

End of procedure

5.3.7

Initialize Snap Data Volume


The [Initialize Snap Data Volume] function initializes the management information for the Snap Data Volume (SDV) that is created as the copy destination for SnapOPC+. When using the SnapOPC+, create the Snap Data Volume as the copy destination from the screen to create a volume. The Snap Data Volume includes the data area and copy management information area. This function is used to initialize the management information for the Snap Data Volume when changing the copy source or canceling the copy. Note that data area will not be initialized (formatted). In the following conditions, the management information for the Snap Data Volume (SDV) cannot be initialized. When there is no volume to be initialized When the target volume is not Snap Data Volume When the target volume status is not "Available" When the copy session is specified for the target volume When this function is already in operation in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/ DX90 The procedure to initialize a Snap Data Volume is as follows:

Procedure

Click the [Initialize Snap Data Volume] under the [Volume Management] menu on the [Volume Settings] tab.
The [Initialize Snap Data Volume] screen appears.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

125

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 5 Configuration > 5.3 Volume Management

Select the Snap Data Volume to be initialized from the tree in the left of the screen, or "Volume List" field.

The detailed information of the selected volume is displayed.

Click the [Initialize] button.

A confirmation screen appears.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

126

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 5 Configuration > 5.3 Volume Management

Click the [OK] button.

The selected Snap Data Volumes are initialized.

End of procedure

5.3.8

Release Reservation
Some servers may reserve volumes. A volume in Reserve (Persistent Reserve) status set by the server can be released, and all Reservation Keys can be deleted with GUI. Normally, the server executes Reserve (occupation) and Release (release occupation) of a volume. This function is used only when the server cannot release the volume reservation because of a server failure, etc. Be sure to pay attention when using this function as it may cause data corruption. The procedure to release reservation is as follows:

Procedure

Click the [Release Reservation] under the [Volume Management] menu on the [Volume Settings] tab.
The [Release Reservation] screen appears. The following items are displayed: - No. The volume number is displayed. - Name The volume name is displayed. - CM Port The CM port to which the volume is LUN mapped is displayed. - Affinity Group When the host affinity function is used, the affinity group to which the volume is LUN mapped is displayed. - LUN The reserved LUN is displayed. When the volume is not reserved, "-" is displayed. - Registrant Count The number of Reservation Keys registered in the volume is displayed.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

127

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 5 Configuration > 5.3 Volume Management

- Reservation Type When the volume is in persistent reservation status, one of the following persistent reservation types is displayed. WE (Write Exclusive) EA (Exclusive Access) WE-RO (Write Exclusive-Registrants Only) EA-RO (Exclusive Access-Registrants Only) WE-AR (Write Exclusive-All Registrants) EA-AR (Exclusive Access-All Registrants) When the volume is in reservation status other than persistent reservation status, "" is displayed. - Reservation Status The volume reservation status is displayed. "Yes": In persistent reservation status "No": In reservation status, but not in persistent reservation status "-": Only the reservation key is registered (not reserved) - APTPL Whether or not persistent reservation information is kept after the ETERNUS DX60/ DX80/DX90 has been shutdown/rebooted is displayed. "Yes": The persistent reservation information is kept. "No": The persistent reservation information is not kept. When the volume is in reservation status other than persistent reservation status, "No" is displayed.

Select the volumes to release the reservation (multiple selections can be made), and click the [Release] button.
Clicking the [Reset] button clears selections for all volumes.

A confirmation screen appears.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

128

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 5 Configuration > 5.3 Volume Management

Click the [OK] button.

The reservation status for the selected volume is released.

End of procedure

5.3.9

Set Volume Name


The [Set Volume Name] function changes the volume name. The procedure to set volume name is as follows:

Procedure

1 2

Click the [Set Volume Name] under the [Volume Management] menu on the [Volume Settings] tab.
The [Set Volume Name] screen appears.

Select the volume to change the volume name from the tree in the left of the screen, or "Volume List" field.

The "Set Volume Name" field is displayed.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

129

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 5 Configuration > 5.3 Volume Management

Specify the following items, and click the [Set] button.


Current Volume Name The current volume name is displayed. New Volume Name Specify a new volume name. Between 1 and 16 alphanumeric characters, symbols (except ', (comma)' and '?', and '% used as the first letter'), and blanks can be used. Volume name that is already registered in the ETERNUS DX60/ DX80/DX90 cannot be specified.

A confirmation screen appears.

Click the [OK] button.

The volume name is changed.

End of procedure

5.3.10

Configure LUN Mapping


The [Configure LUN Mapping] function sets the relationship between a Logical Unit Number (LUN) and volume number. LUN mapping enables the server access to the volumes in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

130

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 5 Configuration > 5.3 Volume Management

Maximum number of LUNs that can be accessed


Note that the number of LUNs that can be accessed varies depending on the host specific mode of host response that is set for the server. The following table shows the maximum number of LUN mappings that can be set.
Host specific mode of host response Normal (other than HP-UX mode) HP-UX mode ETERNUS DX60 256 512 ETERNUS DX80/DX90 256 1024

When changing or deleting LUN mapping during operation, stop access from the server allocated to the target port. To add new LUN mapping, it is not necessary to stop the host access. Mapping to a "Work Volume" during RAID Migration is not allowed. When no volume is defined, this function cannot be used. Host affinity functions cannot be used in the following conditions: - When no affinity group is registered - When there is no port for which host affinity is enabled - When no server is registered to a port for which host affinity is enabled Host affinity group that is allocated to the server cannot be deleted. Up to 1024 LUNs can be mapped by connecting two affinity groups. Servers can access 1024 LUNs only when the host specific mode of the Host Response is "HP-UX mode". Note this when allocating the server and the Affinity Group.

When using the Host Affinity function


This section describes the following settings: LUN Mapping Affinity Group Port connected to the server Specific information (HBA) for the server to access the affinity group This function creates an "affinity group", a combination of volumes and LUN (multiple groups may be created), and allocates them to each server. The procedure to set LUN mapping when using the Host Affinity function is as follows:

Procedure

1 2

Click the [Configure LUN Mapping] under the [Volume Management] menu on the [Volume Settings] tab.
The [Configure LUN Mapping] screen appears.

Click the "Affinity Group" icon on the left of the screen.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

131

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 5 Configuration > 5.3 Volume Management

Click the [Create] button.

The "Affinity Group Setting" and "Define LUN Mapping" fields are displayed.

Set the affinity group name, and volume number to be corresponded to the LUN, and click the [Set] button.
Specify the affinity group name. Between 1 and 16 alphanumeric characters, symbols (except ', (comma)' and '?', and '% used as the first letter'), and blanks can be used. A LUN is displayed as a decimal number. Set the volume number as a decimal number.

Clicking the [Specify Range] button displays a screen for specifying the LUN mapping range. In this screen, LUN ranges can be set (numbers) and corresponding volumes are available. Clicking the [Clear] button clears all the volume numbers. A confirmation screen appears.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

132

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 5 Configuration > 5.3 Volume Management

Click the [OK] button.

The new affinity group is created. Go on to the next setting to allocate affinity group to the server. Repeat Step 1 through Step 5 to set more affinity groups.

6 7 8

Click the [Configure LUN Mapping] under the [Volume Management] menu on the [Volume Settings] tab.
The [Configure LUN Mapping] screen appears.

Click the "Ports" icon on the left of the screen. Select the port to be connected to the server from the tree in the left of the screen or Port List.
Select a port in which "Host Affinity" is "Enable".

Detailed information of the selected port is displayed.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

133

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 5 Configuration > 5.3 Volume Management

Click the [Edit] button.

The "Host Affinity Setting" field is displayed.

10 Allocate the affinity group to the server, and click the [Set] button.

Clicking the [Clear] button changes all the allocated affinity groups to "Disable" A confirmation screen appears.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

134

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 5 Configuration > 5.3 Volume Management

11 Click the [OK] button.

The host affinity setting is executed. LUN mapping configuration when using an affinity group completes. When changing or deleting the an affinity group, select the target affinity group from the tree in the left of screen or target affinity group listed in the "Affinity Group List" field, and click the [Edit] or [Delete] button.

End of procedure

When the Host Affinity function is not used


This section describes the following settings: LUN Mapping Port connected to the server This function specifies the Host LUN allocation to the volume for each port. The procedure to configure LUN Mapping when the Host Affinity function is not used is as follows:

Procedure

1 2

Click the [Configure LUN Mapping] under the [Volume Management] menu on the [Volume Settings] tab.
The [Configure LUN Mapping] screen appears.

Click the "Ports" icon on the left of the screen.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

135

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 5 Configuration > 5.3 Volume Management

Select the target port from the tree in the left of the screen, or Port List.
Select a port in which "Host Affinity" is "Disable".

Detailed information of the selected port is displayed.

Click the [Edit] button.

The "Define LUN Mapping" field is displayed.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

136

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 5 Configuration > 5.3 Volume Management

Change the LUN Mapping information for the target port, and click the [Set] button.
Set the volume number or volume name to be corresponded to the LUN. The LUN is displayed as a decimal number. Set the volume number as a decimal number. Set the volume name between 1 and 16 alphanumeric characters, symbols (except ', (comma)' and '?', and '% used as the first letter').

Clicking the [Specify Range] button displays the screen to specify the LUN mapping in range. In this screen, setting range of LUNs (numbers) and corresponding volumes is available. Clicking the [Clear] button clears all the volume numbers. When deleting the LUN mapping information for the target port, clear all the volume numbers corresponding to the LUN, and click the [Set] button. A confirmation screen appears.

Click the [OK] button.

LUN mapping configuration when an affinity group is not used completes.

End of procedure

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

137

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 5 Configuration > 5.4 Advanced Copy Management

5.4

Advanced Copy Management


Advanced Copy Management provides the following functions. Setup Snap Data Pool Manage Copy Session Register Copy License Modify Copy Parameters Modify EC/OPC Priority Modify Copy Table Size Set Copy Path Modify Port Mode (*1) Modify REC Multiplicity (*1) Modify REC Buffer (*1)
*1: This function is available when using the ETERNUS DX90.

Advanced Copy function


Advanced Copy is a function used to quickly copy data (volume) to another volume in the same device, at any given point in time. By using the copy destination volume, it is possible to backup data without suspending operations. The copy function of ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 can be used by the following methods: Copy in units of volumes using GUI or CLI command Obtaining snapshots of volumes by using the Windows Volume Shadow Copy Service (VSS) function Obtaining backup and replication that is associated with operation by using the ETERNUS SF AdvancedCopy Manager (ACM) The copy function of ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 creates a snapshot of the selected volume. Copy usage (such as backup and replication) and the procedure for copy vary depending on the OS and software to be used. Refer to the manuals for each OS and software for details.

Type of Advanced Copy


Equivalent Copy (EC) function (*2) and One Point Copy (OPC) function (*3) are the available Advanced Copy functions. EC EC is used when copying large volumes, or when processing time can be estimated easily. OPC OPC is used when it is difficult to estimate the backup time.
*2: *3: In this manual, "EC function" indicates EC and Remote Equivalent Copy (REC). In this manual, "OPC function" indicates OPC, QuickOPC, and SnapOPC+.

GUI provides various settings and status displays for the Advanced Copy function. However, only SnapOPC+ sessions can be created using GUI.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

138

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 5 Configuration > 5.4 Advanced Copy Management

Each function is described below.

EC (Mirror Breaking method)


EC makes a mirror copy of the copy source to the copy destination beforehand and then keeping it up to date while it is needed, at which time the mirror relationship is "broken" to reveal the desired copy. The updated data in the copy source will be reflected to the copy destination volume after completing the operation. After mirror is established, all writes are also duplicated.
Copy Source Copy volumes as seen by the server Logical copy Copy Destination

(*4)

Actual state of volumes in the disk storage system

Mirror may be broken as and when required.


*4: After mirror is established, all writes are also duplicated.

Also, for ETERNUS DX90, the following function is available.

REC
EC among different devices on the site is called REC. REC is different from EC, EC performs Advanced Copy within the same device, whereas REC copies data between different devices. Advanced Copy between different devices is called Remote Advanced Copy. Remote Advanced Copy can be used to replicate data for making backups and for testing. Note that REC uses the same copy method as EC.
ETERNUS DX90 ETERNUS DX90

Copy source

FC-RA

FC-RA

Copy destination

FC-RA

FC-RA

REC is available when using an ETERNUS DX90. Before using REC, change the FC host port mode to Remote Adapter (RA) using the procedure described in "5.4.8 Modify Port Mode" (page 182).

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

139

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 5 Configuration > 5.4 Advanced Copy Management

By creating a REC connection to an off-site device using network lines, IP lines and fiber optical lines, for data transfer, REC can be performed between remote locations. Remote Advanced Copy between distant locations is called Extended Remote Advanced Copy. It can be used as a data maintenance solution for disaster recovery.
ETERNUS DX90 ETERNUS DX90

Copy source

FC-RA Network line

FC-RA

Copy destination

FC-RA

FC-RA

FC-IP Converter

FC-IP Converter

REC has two transmission modes, asynchronous transmission mode and synchronous transmission mode. Which mode is selected should be based on the line type and the influence on access to the transaction volumes: - Synchronous transmission mode The write completion signal for a write request by the server is only returned after the write to the copy source and the copy write to the copy destination have both completed. However, synchronizing the data copy with the copy source write guarantees the contents of the copy source and copy destination at the time of completion. This method has a significant effect on write accesses from the server, and so is only recommended for device-to-device copies between sites where the communications lag is small. - Asynchronous transmission mode Write completion signals to write requests from the server are returned as soon as the write to the copy source has been done, without waiting for the data to be copied to the copy destination. Copying the data to the copy destination asynchronously with the write allows the copy to be performed without affecting the write performance of the server/copy source pair. This method is recommended for device-to-device copies between devices at remote sites. This method is used for remote disaster backups. Asynchronous mode has two sub-modes, Stack mode and Consistency mode. Which should be selected will depend on the pattern of usage. There is also a Through mode that is used to finalize data transfer for the other two modes. Stack mode Only updated block positions are recorded before returning the completion signal to the server, so waiting-for-response effects on the server are small. Actual transfer of the recorded blocks can be performed by an independent transfer engine. This mode is mainly used for remote backup. This mode can be used even when the available line bandwidth is small, but a large amount of untransferred data can accumulate as a result.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

140

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 5 Configuration > 5.4 Advanced Copy Management

Consistency mode This mode guarantees the sequential transmission of updates to the destination device in the same order as the writes occurred. This is useful when mirroring databases and copies of multiple connected areas. This mode uses a part of the cache memory as a transfer buffer. The blocks being copied are "saved" into a send buffer and then transferred to the receive buffer, from which they are then "extracted". When using the Concurrent Suspend function, the transfer mode does not need to be changed to the Through mode. Through mode This mode is not used for normal transfers, but rather to transfer all as-yetuntransferred data when stopping or suspending the Consistency mode or Stack mode.

OPC (Background Copy method)


The OPC function logically copies all data from the copy source to the copy destination in the same device, when the host requests the operation. The ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 immediately returns an OPC completion response to the copy request. This function then allows prompt access to both the original and copied data while the actual physical copying proceeds in the background. Unlike EC, the updated data in the copy source will not be reflected to the copy destination volume after completing the operation.
Copy Source Copy volumes as seen by the server Logical copy Copy Destination

Actual state of volumes in the disk storage system

Background copy

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

141

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 5 Configuration > 5.4 Advanced Copy Management

The following functions relating to the OPC are also available.

QuickOPC
Just as for OPC, QuickOPC copies all the data in the copy source volume at the initialphysical copy. After the initial-physical copy has completed, only updated data needs to be copied hereafter. Because it reduces the copy volume and realizes high-speed backup, QuickOPC is recommended for backing up a large-scale database.
Copy Source Copy volumes as seen by the server Logical copy Copy Destination

Only updated data is copied Actual state of volumes in the disk storage system

Background copy

SnapOPC+
SnapOPC+ manages data by allocating OPC data and sessions that form generations, and copies updated data only to the latest generation. SnapOPC+ manages generations of differences between updated data as modification history. It enables copying to be performed with less physical capacity. Maximum number of generations varies depending on the ETERNUS models and software. SnapOPC+ is recommended for backing up less updated volumes such as the file server.
Copy Source Copy volumes as seen by the server Logical Copy Copy Destination

(*5) Original data is copied before being overwritten. Up to 8 generations can be copied.

Actual state of volumes in the disk storage system

*5: Original data is referenced when an uncopied area is read.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

142

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 5 Configuration > 5.4 Advanced Copy Management

SnapOPC+ uses the unique volume (Snap Data Volume: SDV) as a copy destination. Also, a setting pool area for SDV (Snap Data Pool Volume), to continue the copy session even when the amount of update data exceeds the SDV capacity, is available. - SDV (Snap Data Volume) SDV is an area used as a copy destination for SnapOPC+. Only one copy destination can be specified per SDV. Refer to "5.3.1 Create Volume" (page 111) for detailed procedure to create SDV. - SDP (Snap Data Pool) SDP is a standby storage area to continue sessions even when the amount of update data exceeds the SDV capacity. It enables the storage area to be supplied from SDP to SDV as required. This continues the copy session even when the amount of update data exceeds the SDV capacity. Note that SDP is configured by a unique volume Snap Data Pool Volume (SDPV). Creating SDPV enables SDP. - SDPV (Snap Data Pool Volume) SDPV is a unique volume for SDP. Created SDPV is automatically added to the SDP. - SDPE (Snap Data Pool Element) SDPE is a unit of SDP that is managed in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90. Once the copy destination SDV capacity runs out, SDPEs are supplied from SDP to SDV and the storage area is automatically expanded. Supplied storage (SDPE) returns to SDP after the copy session complete. Note that SDPE capacity is fixed to 1GB.
Copy source Copy destination

Logical copy

Seen by server to have the same capacity as the original volume.

SDP

In actuality, only the changes to original data are copied and kept.

SDV

SDPE SDPE SnapOPC+

Extra storage areas (SDPE) are supplied as the available SDV capacity for the copy destination runs out.

SDPE supplied to the SDV are returned to the SDP after the copy session has been deleted.(*6)

*6: After the ETERNUS SF AdvancedCopy Manager (ACM) completes the session instead of a user, another SnapOPC+ copy session may be created. The ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 returns the SDPE when accepting a SnapOPC+ session deletion request.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

143

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 5 Configuration > 5.4 Advanced Copy Management

Preparations for the Advanced Copy function


This section describes how to prepare for using the Advanced Copy function and copy session management.

Advanced preparation
The following preparations are required when using Advanced Copy functions. - License registration Register a license for using the Advanced Copy function. If a license is not registered, up to eight copy sessions can be performed. When an Advanced Copy feature is purchased, refer to "5.4.3 Register Copy License" (page 154) to register the license. - Copy destination volume creation Create a physical volume according to the amount of updated data in the copy source volume. When performing SnapOPC+, create SDV and SDP. Refer to "5.3.1 Create Volume" (page 111) and "5.4.1 Setup Snap Data Pool" (page 145) for details. The RAID configuration of the copy source and copy destination can be different. The copy source and copy destination volume encryption status must match. - Copy table size setting Set the copy table size depending on the capacity of the copy target volume. Refer to "5.4.6 Modify Copy Table Size" (page 159). - Copy priority setting Specify the copy priority in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90. Refer to "5.4.5 Modify EC/OPC Priority" (page 157). When performing SnapOPC+, the following preparations are also required. - Copy parameter setting Specify the threshold to report the shortage of SDP volume capacity during the copy operation. Refer to "5.4.4 Modify Copy Parameters" (page 155). When performing REC, the following preparations are also required. - Port mode setting Specify a threshold for notification when a shortage of SDP volume capacity occurs during the copy operation. Refer to "5.4.8 Modify Port Mode" (page 182). - Copy path setting Set the Copy path information between devices. Refer to "5.4.7 Set Copy Path" (page 163). - REC buffer setting Set the transfer buffer setting when performing REC in asynchronous consistency mode. Refer to "5.4.10 Modify REC Buffer" (page 186).

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

144

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 5 Configuration > 5.4 Advanced Copy Management

- REC multiplicity setting Set the multiplicity used for performing REC. This setting is required when the connection type in the [Set Copy Path] is "Remote". Refer to "5.4.9 Modify REC Multiplicity" (page 184).

Copy session management


After preparation for Advanced Copy is complete, create a copy session to start copying volumes. During operation, check the status of the copy sessions and delete unnecessary copy sessions. - Copy session creation Create a copy session via Windows Volume Shadow Copy Service (VSS) / ETERNUS SF AdvancedCopy Manager (ACM). Note that GUI can create SnapOPC+ session only. Refer to "5.4.2 Manage Copy Session" (page 151). GUI cannot create copy sessions other than SnapOPC+ sessions. Create copy sessions via VSS/ACM. - Copy session check Check the status of each copy session using the [Advanced Copy Status] screen. Refer to "4.4 Advanced Copy Status" (page 61). For REC sessions, checking copy path and buffer status are also available. Refer to "4.5 Advanced Copy Path Status" (page 63) and "4.6 REC Buffer Status" (page 65). - Copy session deletion Delete unnecessary copy sessions. Data in the copy destination volume loses its meaning (becomes undefined). For SnapOPC+, SDPs used by the deleted copy sessions are released. Refer to "5.4.2 Manage Copy Session" (page 151). In principle, use GUI to delete copy sessions created in GUI. Deleting copy sessions created by software other than GUI, such as Windows Volume Shadow Copy Service (VSS) and ETERNUS SF AdvancedCopy Manager (ACM), is not allowed. However, if deleting from VSS/ACM cannot be performed, use GUI to delete copy sessions.

5.4.1

Setup Snap Data Pool


This section describes how to set Snap Data Pool (SDP), the pool area for SDV.

Create SDPV
This function creates the SDPV in the registered RAID group. When the SDPV creation process is completed, the SDPV will be formatted automatically. The following table shows the conditions for SDPV creation.

Condition of SDPV
The SDPV capacity must be smaller than 2TB

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

145

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 5 Configuration > 5.4 Advanced Copy Management

Conditions of the RAID group to create SDPV


The status of the RAID group must be "Available" or "Present" If volumes are created in the RAID group, the number of volumes in the RAID group must be less than 128 The free area for the RAID group must be equal or larger than 1GB The RAID group must not be blocked The RAID group must not be in the Logical Device Expansion process

The maximum number of SDPVs that can be set


The maximum number of SDPVs for ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 is shown below.
Device name ETERNUS DX60 ETERNUS DX80/DX90 per RAID group Up to 128 Up to 128 per device Up to 512 Up to 1024

If the encryption mode is disabled, encrypted SDPV cannot be created. The following functions cannot be used for SDPV: - Host Affinity settings - LUN mapping - Volume Encryption - LUN Concatenation - RAID Migration This function cannot be used in the following conditions: - No RAID groups are registered in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 - When no SDPV is created in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90, and the RAID group is in the following conditions: Only one RAID group is registered in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/ DX90, and Logical Device Expansion is in progress in the RAID group The status of all the RAID groups is not "Available", or "Present" - When no SDPV is created in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90, and the maximum number of volumes for each model is already registered.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

146

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 5 Configuration > 5.4 Advanced Copy Management

Unlike other volumes, SDPV cannot be created by "5.3.1 Create Volume" (page 111) menu or deleted by "5.3.2 Delete Volume" (page 114) menu. While SDPV can be created in any level RAID group, it is recommended that the same RAID group configuration be used for all SDPVs created. The maximum capacity of SDP is 32TB for ETERNUS DX60, and 64TB for ETERNUS DX80/DX90. Allocated space (SDPE) to SDV from the SDPV is released in the following conditions: - When deleting the SnapOPC+ session: If one SnapOPC+ session is deleted, all the SnapOPC+ sessions started earlier than that session are also deleted. The space used in the SDV for the stopped generation is released. - When the SnapOPC+ session turns to "Error" status: If one SnapOPC+ session status turns to Error, the status for all the SnapOPC+ sessions started earlier than that session also change to Error. The space used in the SDV for the generation in Error status is released. The procedure to create SDPV is as follows:

Procedure

1 2

Click the [Setup Snap Data Pool] under the [Advanced Copy Management] menu on the [Volume Settings] tab.
The [Setup Snap Data Pool] screen appears.

Click the [Create] button.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

147

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 5 Configuration > 5.4 Advanced Copy Management

Select the target RAID group icon in the tree on the left of the screen or RAID Group List where the SDPV is created.

The detailed information of the selected RAID group is displayed.

Specify the following items, and click the [Create] button.


Volume Name Specify the SDPV name. Between 1 and 16 alphanumeric characters, symbols (except ', (comma)' and '?', and '% used as the first letter'), and blanks can be used. Type The volume type (SDPV) is displayed. Capacity (GB) Specify the SDPV capacity. Encryption Select "Enable" or "Disable" the encryption mode for the new volume. Number of Volumes When creating multiple volumes with the same type and capacity, enter the number of volumes to be created. Created volume name is "specified volume name + running number starting from 0".

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

148

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 5 Configuration > 5.4 Advanced Copy Management

A confirmation screen appears.

Click the [OK] button.

Snap Data Pool setting is started. The SDPV is created in the selected RAID group. After SDPV is created, new volume is automatically formatted.

End of procedure

Delete SDPV
This function deletes the registered SDPV. There are two methods for deletion: "Reserve Delete" and "Force Delete". Reserve Delete If the target SDPV is being used, the SDPV is scheduled for deletion. SDPV that is scheduled for deletion will be deleted after the Advanced Copy session completes (when the usage of SDPV becomes "0"). Force Delete The selected SDPV is forcibly deleted even if the copy session is under progress. However, SDPV that is scheduled for deletion cannot be deleted. Wait for the scheduled deletion to occur. Up to 128 SDPVs can be deleted at the same time.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

149

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 5 Configuration > 5.4 Advanced Copy Management

The procedure to delete SDPV is as follows:

Procedure

1 2

Click the [Setup Snap Data Pool] under the [Advanced Copy Management] menu on the [Volume Settings] tab.
The [Setup Snap Data Pool] screen appears.

Select the target SDPV from the tree on the left of the screen or "SDPV List" field, and click the [Reserve Delete] button or [Force Delete] button.

Click the [OK] button.

The selected SDPV is deleted.

End of procedure

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

150

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 5 Configuration > 5.4 Advanced Copy Management

5.4.2

Manage Copy Session


The [Manage Copy Session] function creates and deletes the Advanced Copy session. Only the SnapOPC+ copy sessions can be created using GUI. For creating EC, REC, OPC, QuickOPC sessions, use copy management software for the server.

Create Copy Session


The procedure to create copy session is as follows:

Procedure

Click the [Manage Copy Session] under the [Advanced Copy Management] menu on the [Volume Settings] tab.
The [Manage Copy Session] screen appears. The Advanced Copy session list is displayed.

Click the [Start New Session] button.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

151

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 5 Configuration > 5.4 Advanced Copy Management

Select the copy source volume and copy destination volume, and click the [Start New SnapOPC+ Session] button.

A confirmation screen appears.

Click the [OK] button.

The created Advanced Copy session is started.

End of procedure

Delete Copy Session


The procedure to delete copy session is as follows:

Procedure

Click the [Manage Copy Session] under the [Advanced Copy Management] menu on the [Volume Settings] tab.
The [Manage Copy Session] screen appears. The list of Advanced Copy session registered in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 is displayed.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

152

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 5 Configuration > 5.4 Advanced Copy Management

Select the copy session to be deleted from the "Advanced Copy Session List", and click the [Stop Session] button.

A confirmation screen appears.

Click the [OK] button.

The selected Advanced Copy session is deleted.

End of procedure

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

153

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 5 Configuration > 5.4 Advanced Copy Management

5.4.3

Register Copy License


The [Register Copy License] function is used to register an Advanced Copy license. The procedure to register a copy license is as follows:

Procedure

1 2

Click the [Register Copy License] under the [Advanced Copy Management] menu on the [Volume Settings] tab.
The [Register Copy License] screen appears.

Input the license key, and click the [Register Copy License] button.

A confirmation screen appears.

Click the [OK] button.

The Advanced Copy License is registered.

End of procedure

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

154

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 5 Configuration > 5.4 Advanced Copy Management

5.4.4

Modify Copy Parameters


The [Modify Copy Parameters] function sets the parameters to enable automatic reporting and processing when a SDP capacity shortage occurs during the SnapOPC+ operation. If the copy source data exceeds the physical capacity of copy destination (and when the free SDP does not exist), an error occurs in the relevant copy session and other older copy sessions. This function prevents stopping copy session when the capacity shortage occurs. There are two methods for notification; E-mail and SNMP Trap. ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 reports the notification using the method specified in the [Setup Event Notification] screen. Select whether to notify when a SDP capacity shortage occurs. When notifying, select the notification method in advance. The procedure to modify copy parameters is as follows:

Procedure

1 2

Click the [Modify Copy Parameters] under the [Advanced Copy Management] menu on the [Volume Settings] tab.
The [Modify Copy Parameters] screen appears.

Specify the following items, and click the [Set] button.


Select the threshold for SDP usage ratio. The magnitude relation for each value must be in the following order: Threshold for Policy Level 1 < Threshold for Policy Level 2 < Threshold for Policy Level 3 Policy Level 1 (Informational) of Snap Data Pool - Threshold (%) Specify the usage ratio of SDP between 1 and 97. If the copy source data exceeds the specified value, the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/ DX90 notifies that effect. Policy Level 2 (Warning) of Snap Data Pool - Threshold (%) Specify the usage ratio of SDP between 2 and 98. If the copy source data exceeds the specified value, the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/ DX90 notifies that effect. Policy Level 3 (Error) of Snap Data Pool - Threshold (%) Specify the usage ratio of SDP between 3 and 99. If the copy source data exceeds the specified value, the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/ DX90 notifies that effect.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

155

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 5 Configuration > 5.4 Advanced Copy Management

When reporting automatically if the threshold is exceeded, set the notification method using the method specified in the "6.4.7 Setup Event Notification" (page 243) in advance. Notification of the shortage of SDP capacity is sent only once for each policy level. Even if the threshold is satisfied again within the 24 hours from the first notification, the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/ DX90 does not report that effect. After 24 hours has passed, the device sends a notification again. If the threshold for multiple policies is satisfied at the same time, the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 notifies of the highest policy level.

A confirmation screen appears.

Click the [OK] button.

The specified copy parameters are registered.

End of procedure

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

156

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 5 Configuration > 5.4 Advanced Copy Management

5.4.5

Modify EC/OPC Priority


The [Modify EC/OPC Priority] function is used to set the copy speed when using EC (EC and REC(*1)) and OPC (OPC, QuickOPC, and SnapOPC+). The EC/OPC speed is usually set in consideration of the host's I/O load and copy processing load. The set speed of EC/OPC becomes effective when the next session starts. Select the EC/OPC priority from the following: Automatic Priority This mode changes the EC/OPC priority automatically in response to the operating load status. High Priority This mode operates by making maximum use of internal resources. This mode greatly affects host access performance, thus should not be used during normal operation. Use when the operation load is low. Low Priority This is a mode in which the influence on host access is reduced to a minimum. Set this mode when using EC and/or OPC during operation.
*1: The REC priority is specified using the [Modify REC Multiplicity] function, however, setting values specified here are available in the following conditions: When the connection type is "Direct" When the REC multiplicity is not specified Refer to "5.4.7 Set Copy Path" (page 163) for connection type settings. Refer to "5.4.9 Modify REC Multiplicity" (page 184) for REC multiplicity settings.

The procedure to modify EC/OPC priority is as follows:

Procedure

Click the [Modify EC/OPC Priority] under the [Advanced Copy Management] menu on the [Volume Settings] tab.
The [Modify EC/OPC Priority] screen appears.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

157

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 5 Configuration > 5.4 Advanced Copy Management

Specify the following item, and click the [Set] button.


EC/OPC Priority Select the EC/OPC speed from "Automatic Priority", "High Priority", or "Low Priority".

A confirmation screen appears.

Click the [OK] button.

The selected EC/OPC priority is set.

End of procedure

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

158

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 5 Configuration > 5.4 Advanced Copy Management

5.4.6

Modify Copy Table Size


The [Modify Copy Table Size] function is used to set the control table size on the CM cache memory installed in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90, which is used by the device firmware. When an EC (EC or REC), or OPC (OPC, QuickOPC, or SnapOPC+) function is in use, this control table (hereafter: copy table) is used as the bitmap area that manages the progress of the copy. Changed settings will be effective when the next session is started. When the copy table size is equal to 0MB, copy functions cannot be used. Note that the initial (factory default) copy table size setting is 0MB. Make sure to stop the copy session before reducing the copy table size. The copy session status can be checked from the [Advanced Copy Status] screen on the [Status] tab. Copy table size (table size) and resolution vary according to the copy capacity and number of sessions that are operated at the same time. (1) Resolution This value determines the amount of data each bit in the copy bitmap represents. The allowed resolution settings of "1 (standard)", "2", "4", "8", and "16" respectively give 8KB, 16KB, 32KB, 64KB, and 128KB regions of data per bitmap bit. The same value is used for all the copy sessions in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90. The resolution should be set as small as possible to reduce the internal process overhead. Set "1" if possible. (2) Copy Table Size A dedicated memory area is required for Advanced Copy management and is allocated as a table size. The table size and resolution settings are determined by the copy capacity and the number of sessions (volumes) that will be run simultaneously. The following shows the table sizing formula. S (Table size) [MB] = S1 (EC/REC table size) [MB] + S2 (OPC table size without OPC Restoration) [MB] + S3 (OPC table size with OPC Restoration) [MB] + S4 (QuickOPC table size without OPC Restoration) [MB] + S5 (QuickOPC table size with OPC Restoration) [MB] + S6 (SnapOPC+ table size) [MB]

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

159

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 5 Configuration > 5.4 Advanced Copy Management

Round the derived value up to the next multiple of 8 to obtain the correct setting for the copy table size. A copy table of the appropriate size (as derived above) is created in each controller (CM0/CM1). If the total table size value (S) exceeds the maximum size allowed, adjust the resolution (M) upward until the maximum table size is no longer exceeded. The resolution should be kept as small as possible. Maximum allowed table sizes are as follows: ETERNUS DX60: 64MB ETERNUS DX80/DX90: 128MB Allowance should be made for possible future increases in the copy capacity when calculating the EC/OPC/QuickOPC/SnapOPC+ table size. If the resolution is changed during an existing copy session, the table sizing formula described in this section is not applied. The same bitmap ratio (M) value must be used by both the copy source device and copy destination device. If the bitmap ratio settings for the copy source and copy destination devices are different, REC cannot be performed. Note that the table sizes (S) do not need to be identical. When different recommended bitmap ratios are calculated for of the copy source and copy destination devices, use whichever bitmap ratio is larger for both devices, recalculating the table size setting for the device whose original bitmap ratio was lower.

EC/REC table size (S1)


M: Resolution C1: EC/REC copy capacity [GB](*1) N1: Number of EC/REC sessions S1 [MB] = ((2 C1 / M) + N1) 8 [KB] / 1024 (counting fractions as one)

OPC table size without OPC Restoration (S2)


M: Resolution C2: Copy capacity for OPC where OPC is not used for OPC Restoration [GB](*1) N2: Number of OPC sessions where OPC is not used for OPC Restoration S2 [MB] = ((2 C2 / M) + N2) 8 [KB] / 1024 (counting fractions as one)

OPC table size with OPC Restoration (S3)


M: Resolution C3: Copy capacity for OPC where OPC is used for OPC Restoration [GB](*1) N3: Number of OPC sessions where OPC is used for OPC Restoration S3 [MB] = ((2 C3 / M) + N3) 2 8 [KB] / 1024 (counting fractions as one)

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

160

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 5 Configuration > 5.4 Advanced Copy Management

QuickOPC table size without OPC Restoration (S4)


M: Resolution C4: Copy capacity for QuickOPC where QuickOPC is not used for OPC Restoration [GB](*1) N4: Number of QuickOPC sessions where QuickOPC is not used for OPC Restoration S4 [MB] = ((2 C4 / M) + N4) 2 8 [KB] / 1024 (counting fractions as one)

QuickOPC table size with OPC Restoration (S5)


M: Resolution C5: Copy capacity for QuickOPC where QuickOPC is used for OPC Restoration [GB](*1) N5: Number of QuickOPC sessions where QuickOPC is used for OPC Restoration S5 [MB] = ((2 C5 / M) + N5) 3 8 [KB] / 1024 (counting fractions as one)

SnapOPC+ table size (S6)


M: Resolution C6: Copy capacity for SnapOPC+ [GB](*2) N6: Number of SnapOPC+ sessions(*3) S6 [MB] = ((2 C6 / M) + N6) 8 [KB] / 1024 (counting fractions as one)
*1: For EC, OPC, QuickOPC, and REC copy sources, the copy capacity is the total capacity of all volumes (slices or partitions) in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 that are defined as copy sources. For REC copy destinations, the copy capacity is the total capacity of all the volumes (slices or partitions) in the ETERNUS DX90 that are defined as copy destinations. For multi-copy sessions, the copy capacity is the total capacity of multi-copy source volumes (slices or partitions), multiplied by the number of multi-copy destinations for each copy source. [Example] Calculating capacity of multi-copy sessions: Copy area in the copy source volume A: 200MB, Number of multi-copy destination: 4 Copy area in the copy source volume B: 500MB, Number of multi-copy destination: 8

200 4 + 500 8 = 4800MB. Add this 4,800MB to the copy capacity C1, C2, or C4, depending on the copy type. (For EC and REC, add the value to C1. For OPC, add the value to C2. For QuickOPC, add the value to C4.) When using EC or REC, add the number of multi-copy sessions to obtain N1. When using OPC, add the number of multi-copy sessions to obtain N2. When using QuickOPC, add the number of multi-copy sessions to obtain N4. In this example, use 12 (= 4 + 8) for N1, N2, or N4, depending on the copy type. When using multi-copy and executing OPC Restoration from the copy destination, select one copy destination and apply the above formula. (For QuickOPC, the QuickOPC destination should be used.) Other copy destinations are calculated as for normal multi-copy.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

161

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 5 Configuration > 5.4 Advanced Copy Management

*2:

For SnapOPC+, copy capacity indicates the total capacity of SnapOPC+ copy source volumes (slices or partitions) number of generations in a device. [Example] Calculating capacity of SnapOPC+ sessions: SnapOPC+ copy area in the copy source volume C: 200MB, Number of SnapOPC+ generations: 8 SnapOPC+ copy area in the copy source volume D: 500MB, Number of SnapOPC+ generations: 4

Capacity of SnapOPC+ copy source = 200 [MB] 8 + 500 [MB] 4 = 3600 [MB] 3600 [MB] derived above is the copy source capacity C6. *3: In the example above, use 12 (= 8 + 4) for N6, the number of SnapOPC+ sessions (total number of generations).

The procedure to set the copy table size is as follows:

Procedure

1 2

Click the [Modify Copy Table Size] under the [Advanced Copy Management] menu on the [Volume Settings] tab.
The [Modify Copy Table Size] screen appears.

Specify the following items, and click the [Set] button.


Advanced Copy feature enabled Select whether to turn the Advanced Copy feature "On" or "Off". Copy Table Size - Resolution Select from " 1", " 2", " 4", " 8", or " 16". - Table Size (MB) For ETERNUS DX60, select between 0 and 64 (MB). For ETERNUS DX80/DX90, select between 0 and 128 (MB). (Unit: 8MB) "Off" can be selected for the "Advanced Copy feature enabled" when the copy table size is 0 (MB). Stop the copy session before reducing the table size.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

162

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 5 Configuration > 5.4 Advanced Copy Management

A confirmation screen appears.

Click the [OK] button.

The copy table size is set.

End of procedure

5.4.7

Set Copy Path


The [Set Copy Path] function creates copy path information used for REC on the wizard screen. The copy path information for the local device and copy path information between different devices can be set. Download the created path information to a PC and apply it to other devices. This simplifies settings for the next devices. The [Set Copy Path] provides the following functions: (1) Register Device Information Register the Box IDs for devices to create a copy path. Registering two or more devices is required when creating a copy path. Also, select a port to be used for creating the copy path for each device. (2) Create Copy Path Create copy path information between devices.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

163

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 5 Configuration > 5.4 Advanced Copy Management

(3) Download Download one of the following information sets in file format. - Copy path information created in (2) - Existing copy path information - Device information (4) Apply Copy Path Apply the copy path information in the local device (*1) (5) Measure Round Trip Time Measures the round trip time between the local and remote devices. Operation mode can be selected in the Start screen of the Set Copy Path wizard. Select and perform one of the functions described above. Register Device Information (Register) Create Copy Path (Create) Download (Download) Apply Copy Path (Apply) Measure Round Trip Time (Measure)
*1: Copy path information of the local device can be deleted from the Apply Copy Path screen.

This function is available when using an ETERNUS DX90. One source device can have copy paths set for a maximum of 16 destination devices. Up to eight copy paths can be created between a pair of remote and local devices. Up to 32 ports can be connected from one port. The procedure for setting copy path is as follows:

Select Operation Mode


Select the operation mode.

Procedure

Click the [Set Copy Path] under the [Advanced Copy Management] menu on the [Volume Settings] tab.
The [Copy Path Setting Wizard] screen appears in the [Set Copy Path] screen.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

164

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 5 Configuration > 5.4 Advanced Copy Management

Select the operation mode, and click the [Next >] button.
Operation Mode Create Copy Path Export Copy Path Information Export Storage System Information Apply Copy Path Measure Round Trip Time

The screen that is displayed varies depending on the selected operation mode. - When selecting "Operation Mode Create Copy Path" The screen for selecting the copy path creation method appears. Proceed with the procedure described in "Register Device Information". - When selecting "Export Copy Path Information" The screen for exporting the copy path information appears. Proceed with the procedure described in "Download". - When selecting "Export Storage System Information" The screen for exporting storage system information appears. Proceed with the procedure described in "Download". - When selecting "Apply Copy Path" The screen for applying the copy path appears. Proceed with the procedure described in "Apply Copy Path". - When selecting "Measure Round Trip Time" The screen for measuring round trip time appears. Proceed with the procedure described in "Measure Round Trip Time".

End of procedure

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

165

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 5 Configuration > 5.4 Advanced Copy Management

Register Device Information

Procedure

Specify the following items, and click the [Next >] button.
Use of existing information Select the following items when using existing device information. - Use storage system(Backup File) Use the backup file stored in the device system disk. - Use file The copy path information file is stored in the PC that it was created in using the procedure described in "Create Copy Path" and exported using the procedure described in "Download". - Not use Add of device information Select whether to add device information or not. - Add Select the addition method from "File", "Manual", or both of "File" and "Manual". When selecting "File" or both "File" and "Manual", use the existing device information. Device information includes the device Box ID. - Not add

The next screen varies depending on the selected item. - When selecting "Use storage system(Backup File)" A confirmation screen for registering device information appears. Proceed to Step 3. - When selecting "Use file" The Select Copy Path Information File screen appears. Proceed to Step 2. - When selecting "Not use" When selecting "File" or both "File" and "Manual" as the addition method, the screen for selecting the device information file appears. Proceed to Step 7. When selecting "Manual" for the addition method, the screen for inputting device information appears. Proceed to Step 11.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

166

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 5 Configuration > 5.4 Advanced Copy Management

Specify the copy path information file, and click the [Next >] button.

A confirmation screen for registering device information appears.

Select the Box ID for the device that will be registered, and click the [Next >] button.

A confirmation screen appears.

Click the [OK] button.

The specified contents are registered. The screen to select a port appears. Proceed to Step 5. However, if the target device is not selected in Step 3 (or the selected device does not exist), the port selecting screen does not appear. The screen for selecting a device information file appears instead. Proceed to Step 7.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

167

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 5 Configuration > 5.4 Advanced Copy Management

Select the port to be used for each device, and click the [Next >] button.
Select the port in which the port mode is "RA".

A confirmation screen appears.

Click the [OK] button.

The specified contents are registered. The screen for selecting a device information file appears.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

168

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 5 Configuration > 5.4 Advanced Copy Management

Specify the following items, and click the [Next >] button.
Select Operation Method - Finish of Registration by File Reading - Registration from File Select Device Information File - Device information file When selecting "Registration from File", specify the location where the device information file is stored.

The specified contents are registered. When selecting "Registration from File", the execution screen for reading a device information file appears. Then, the screen for selecting a port appears. Proceed to Step 8. When selecting "Finish of Registration by File Reading", and "Manual" is selected for the "Add of device information" field in Step 1, the screen for inputting device information appears. Proceed to Step 11. If "Manual" is not selected, a confirmation screen for the device information appears. Proceed to Step 15.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

169

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 5 Configuration > 5.4 Advanced Copy Management

Select the port to be used for each device, and click the [Next >] button.
Select the port in which the port mode is "RA".

A confirmation screen appears.

Click the [OK] button.

The specified contents are registered. Returns to the screen for selecting a device information file.

10 Click the [Next >] button.


When "Manual" is selected for the "Add device information" field in Step 1, the screen for inputting device information appears. Proceed to Step 11. If "Manual" is not selected in Step 1, a confirmation screen for the device information appears. Proceed to Step 15.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

170

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 5 Configuration > 5.4 Advanced Copy Management

11 Specify the following items, and click the [Next >] button.
When "Manual" is selected, specify the Box ID and Unique Number. Select Operation Method - Finish of Registration by File Reading - Registration by Manual Operation Device Information Setting - Box ID Input the Box ID for the new device that will be registered using 40 characters. Capital letters, numerals, symbols (#), and blanks can be used. - Unique Number Input a unique number for the new device that will be registered using 4 hexadecimal numbers. Enter the value of the fifth and sixth bytes of the WWN. [Example] When the WWN is 500000E0D04C5800: Enter "4C58"

The specified contents are registered. When selecting "Registration by Manual Operation", the screen for setting a port appears. Proceed to Step 12. If "Finish of Registration by File Reading" is selected, a confirmation screen for device information appears. Proceed to Step 15.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

171

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 5 Configuration > 5.4 Advanced Copy Management

12 Select the port to be used for each device, and click the [Next >] button.
Select the port in which the port mode is "RA".

A confirmation screen appears.

13 Click the [OK] button.

A confirmation screen for device information appears.

14 Click the [Next >] button.


A confirmation screen appears.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

172

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 5 Configuration > 5.4 Advanced Copy Management

15 Click the [Next >] button.

The specified contents are registered. The screen for selecting a device to create a copy path appears. Proceed with the procedure described in "Create Copy Path".

End of procedure

Create Copy Path


Create copy path. Specify the Box ID for the device to create a copy path, and set line information and the copy path between the devices.

Procedure

Select the Box ID for the destination device connected to the source device to create the copy path, and click the [Next >] button.

The screen for creating a copy path appears.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

173

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 5 Configuration > 5.4 Advanced Copy Management

Specify the following items, and click the [Next >] button.
Select Copy Path - Set Line Connection Type Select "Remote" or "Direct". Link Speed (Mbit/s) When selecting "Remote" in the Connection Type field, specify the link speed between 1 and 65535(Mbit/s). Compression Ratio (%) When selecting "Remote" for the Connection Type field, specify the line compression ratio between 0 and 99(%). - Copy Path Select the copy path between the copy source and destination devices.

Returns to the screen to select device creating copy path.

Create copy paths to all the destination devices for each source device.
Select the "Change Source Device" and click the [Next >] button to change the source device.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

174

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 5 Configuration > 5.4 Advanced Copy Management

After creating copy paths to all the destination devices, select the "Finish Path Creating" and click the [Next >] button.

A confirmation screen for the copy path appears.

Click the [Next >] button.

The screen for downloading a file appears. Proceed with the procedure described in "Download".

End of procedure

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

175

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 5 Configuration > 5.4 Advanced Copy Management

Download
Download the copy path information created with the procedure described in "Create Copy Path" or existing copy path information. By downloading the copy path information as a file, copy path information can be applied to the local and other devices.

Procedure

Click the [Download] button.


Download File screen (Create Path) This screen is displayed when selecting "Create Copy Path" for "Operation Mode".

Download File screen (Export Copy Path Information) This screen is displayed when selecting "Export Copy Path Information" for "Operation Mode".

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

176

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 5 Configuration > 5.4 Advanced Copy Management

Download File screen (Export Storage System Information) This screen is displayed when selecting "Export Storage System Information" for "Operation Mode".

If no RA ports are defined in the ETERNUS DX90, downloading information is not allowed (the [Download] button is not displayed).

Click the [Next >] button or [Finish] button.


When applying copy path information, click the [Next >] button. When finishing the settings, click the [End] button. A confirmation screen or exit confirmation screen appears.

Click the [OK] button.


When clicking the [Next >] button in Step 2, the screen for applying copy path information appears. Proceed to "Apply Copy Path" When clicking the [End] button in Step 2, the exit screen appears. Proceed to "Exit Wizard".

End of procedure

Apply Copy Path


Apply or delete copy path information in the local device. When applying copy path information, the copy path currently registered in the local device is deleted. If REC sessions exist in the local device, changing or deleting copy path information in use affects copy operation. If deleting copy path when no path information exists between the local and remote devices, all the copy path information in the local device will be deleted.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

177

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 5 Configuration > 5.4 Advanced Copy Management

Procedure

Select one of the following items, and click the [Next >] button.
Copy Path Information - Set path information Specify the location of copy path information file. - Delete the path information of the device

This screen is not displayed when selecting "Create Copy Path" for operation mode. The screen for confirming copy path information appears instead. Proceed to Step 2. When selecting "Set path information", the screen to confirm copy path information appears. Proceed to Step 2. When selecting "Delete the path information of the device", a confirmation screen appears. Proceed to Step 3.

Click the [Next >] button.

A confirmation screen appears.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

178

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 5 Configuration > 5.4 Advanced Copy Management

Click the [OK] button.


- When selecting "Set path information" A confirmation screen appears. Then the progress screen appears. When selecting "Set path information", the screen for measuring round trip time appears. Proceed with the procedure described in "Measure Round Trip Time". However, if no remote device exists, the exit screen appears. Proceed with the procedure described in "Exit Wizard". When selecting "Delete the path information of the device", the exit screen appears after completing the operation. Proceed with the procedure described in "Exit Wizard".

End of procedure

Measure Round Trip Time


Measure round trip time between the local and remote devices. Destination devices in which the connection type is "Remote" can be target devices. The measured round trip time value is applied to the ETERNUS DX90. Make sure to suspend the REC sessions in advance. When the communication environment between devices is changed, measure the round trip time again. Measuring the round trip time may take a maximum of 160 seconds.

Procedure

Select the target device and click the [Next >] button.

A confirmation screen appears. Proceed to Step 2. However, if no target device is selected, the exit screen appears. Proceed with the procedure described in "Exit Wizard".

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

179

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 5 Configuration > 5.4 Advanced Copy Management

Click the [OK] button.

The execution screen appears. Then the progress screen appears. After completing the process, the result screen for measuring round trip time appears.

Click the [Next >] button.

The exit screen appears. Proceed with the procedure described in "Exit Wizard".

End of procedure

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

180

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 5 Configuration > 5.4 Advanced Copy Management

Exit Wizard
Close the wizard and finish the copy path settings.

Procedure

Click the [Close] button.

The wizard screen is closed. The copy path settings complete.

End of procedure

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

181

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 5 Configuration > 5.4 Advanced Copy Management

5.4.8

Modify Port Mode


The [Modify Port Mode] changes the port mode (Channel Adapter (CA) or Remote Adapter (RA)). CA Used for connecting to the host. RA Used for performing REC. The [Modify Port Mode] function is available when using ETERNUS DX90. When changing the port mode of a live port from "CA" to "RA", it is necessary to stop the host access connected to the CA Port to be changed. To change the mode of a newly added port, it is not necessary to stop host access. When changing the port mode of a live port from "RA" to "CA", it is necessary to check that there is no session in the RA Port to be changed. If changing the port mode, specified copy path information in the target port will be deleted. If changing the port mode from "CA" to "RA", LUN mapping information in the target CA port will be deleted. If changing the port mode from "RA" to "CA", specified copy path information in the target RA port will be deleted. The procedure to modify port mode is as follows:

Procedure

Click the [Modify Port Mode] under the [Advanced Copy Management] menu on the [Volume Settings] tab.
The [Modify Port Mode] screen appears.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

182

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 5 Configuration > 5.4 Advanced Copy Management

Specify the "Port Mode (After)", and click the [Set] button.

A confirmation screen appears.

Click the [OK] button.

The port mode is set.

End of procedure

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

183

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 5 Configuration > 5.4 Advanced Copy Management

5.4.9

Modify REC Multiplicity


The [Modify REC Multiplicity] function sets the REC multiplicity. REC multiplicity is the line speed parameter for each copy path. By specifying the appropriate multiplicity, the device controls the I/O of the line being used for remote connection, and uses lines efficiently. This function is available when using ETERNUS DX90. Normally, do not change REC multiplicity and make sure to use the default ("Auto") setting. If no destination device information is registered, this function is not available. Each line device may not perform with the REC multiplicity specified with this function. Setting values are used as information for using a line efficiently. Suspend the session status between the devices in the following conditions. In other cases, there is no need to suspend the copy session. - When changing the connection method ("Direct" or "Remote") - When measuring round trip time again The REC multiplicity can be specified when selecting "Remote" for the specification mode in "5.4.7 Set Copy Path" (page 163). In the following conditions, EC/OPC priorities specified in "5.4.5 Modify EC/OPC Priority" (page 157) is used instead of REC multiplicity: - When the connection method is "Direct" - When no REC multiplicity is set Specified REC multiplicity is enabled immediately The procedure to set REC multiplicity is as follows:

Procedure

Click the [Modify REC Multiplicity] under the [Advanced Copy Management] menu on the [Volume Settings] tab.
The [Modify REC Multiplicity] screen appears.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

184

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 5 Configuration > 5.4 Advanced Copy Management

Specify the following items, and click the [Set] button.


Specification Mode - Manual Specify REC multiplicity. - Auto Use the recommended multiplicity that is automatically calculated from the device. Multiplicity When selecting "Manual" for the specification mode, specify the REC multiplicity between 1 and 256 using numeral characters.

When the round trip time is not obtained, "***" is displayed. To display the recommended multiplicity, obtaining round trip time using the [Set Copy Path] function is required.

Click the [OK] button.

The REC multiplicity is set.

End of procedure

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

185

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 5 Configuration > 5.4 Advanced Copy Management

5.4.10

Modify REC Buffer


The [Modify REC Buffer] function sets the transfer buffer for copying data via the REC buffer in asynchronous Consistency mode. Copy via REC buffer stores multiple REC session I/Os in the REC buffer for a certain period of time, and copies them in blocks. This enables mirroring of whole database and securing copy speed when performing REC between remote locations, several thousand kilometers away from the source device. Consistency mode stores data in the large capacity of REC transfer buffer for a certain period of time, and copies them at one time. Note that one REC buffer cannot be used bi-directionally (both of sending and receiving). When performing REC bi-directionally, also set the REC buffers in the opposite direction. REC buffer usage can also be checked using the ETERNUS SF AdvancedCopy Manager (ACM). This function is available when using the ETERNUS DX90. REC buffer must be specified for both devices performing REC. Note that one REC buffer is unidirectional. When transferring data bi-directionally, both of sending and receiving REC buffers must be specified in the each device. Up to four REC buffers can be specified. A maximum of 512MB REC buffers in total can be secured. When changing or deleting REC buffers, suspend the sessions using the target REC buffers. When copying data via REC buffer, REC buffer settings are required in both of copy source and copy destination devices. Make the REC buffer size the same for the devices of the copy source and destination. The size will be adjusted to whichever is smaller. If no destination device and/or copy path are set, REC buffer setting is not available.

Refer to "5.4 Advanced Copy Management" (page 138) for details about REC data transfer method and mode. The procedure for setting REC buffer is as follows:

Procedure

Click the [Modify REC Buffer] under the [Advanced Copy Management] menu on the [Volume Settings] tab.
The [Modify REC Buffer] screen appears.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

186

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 5 Configuration > 5.4 Advanced Copy Management

Specify the following items, and click the [Set] button.


Usage Select the usage of REC buffer from "Send" or "Receive". If the REC buffer is not set, "Unused" is displayed. When the target REC buffer is not used, select "Unused". Remote Box ID Select the Box ID for the remote device. A - (hyphen) is displayed when the usage of REC buffer is "Unused". If the REC path information is deleted, "???" is displayed. Select "Unused" for REC buffer usage or select a new remote Box ID. Size (MB) Select the REC buffer size (MB) from the following: - 128 - 256 - 512 REC buffer size is secured from the cache memory. When using broadband connections or responding to temporary line transfer delays, a larger REC buffer size is needed. Forwarding Interval (sec) Select the forwarding interval (second) to transfer the data stored in the REC buffer to the destination device from the following: - 1 - 2 - 4 - 8 - 15 - 30 - 45 - 60 - 75 - 90 - 105 - 120 A long interval will reduce the Host I/O overhead, but increases the amount of data susceptible to loss in the event of disaster.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

187

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 5 Configuration > 5.4 Advanced Copy Management

Monitoring Time (min) Select from 0 to 15 (minutes) for the REC buffer monitoring time. The recommended value is "5 (minutes)". When the REC Buffer has large amounts of data to be stored and is in a high-load state, the time required for I/O responses to the server delays for the specified time in the "HALT Wait Timer" (from the server's viewpoint, the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 seems to be delaying its response). Once the delay state has continued for longer than the watch time setting (this item), all REC Consistency mode sessions that are currently transferring data are HALTed to allow priority processing of the server responses. If "0 (minutes)" is set, monitoring is disabled. HALT Wait Timer (sec) Select from 0 to 15 (seconds) for the HALT Wait Timer. Although the recommended value is "15 (seconds)", select the appropriate value considering the effect on the system. HALT Wait Timer is the maximum no-response time for which host I/O responses may be delayed in order to prioritize data transfers from the REC Buffer when it is in a highload state. When the set time is exceeded, responses for the Host I/O is restarted, but the REC session is automatically HALTed. If "0 (seconds)" is set, the Host I/O always takes priority when this occurs and the copy session is HALTed immediately.

A confirmation screen appears. An error screen appears in the following conditions: Clicking the [Set] button without changing any setting values When two or more REC buffers have the same usage and the same remote Box ID The total size of four REC buffers exceeds 512MB Clicking the [Set] button when any of the remote Box ID is "???"

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

188

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 5 Configuration > 5.4 Advanced Copy Management

Make sure to set the same REC buffer information (size, forwarding interval, monitoring time, and HALT wait timer) for copy source and copy destination devices.

Click the [OK] button.

The REC buffer is set.

End of procedure

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

189

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 6

Global Settings

This chapter describes the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 global setting menu. The global settings provides the following functions: User Management Network Settings Remote Support System Settings Host I/F Management

6.1

User Management
This section describes how to manage the user account.

User Role
The available functions depend on the user role (privileges of the account) used to logon. The following table provides the description for each user role.
User role Advanced Available functions "Advanced" is a maintenance engineer privilege. Functions such as status display, configuration management, and maintenance functions are available. "Standard" is a system administrator privilege. Functions such as status display and configuration management are available. "Monitor" is a general user privilege. Only the status display function is available. Default account f.ce

Standard

root

Monitor

None

6.1.1

Setup User Account


The [Setup User Account] function adds, edits, and deletes the user account. Up to 16 users including default accounts (f.ce and root) can be registered. Default accounts (f.ce and root) can be edited or deleted. Entered letters are case-sensitive. The current user account (your account) can be changed or deleted. When deleting a user account, at least one manager account (Standard or Advanced) must remain. The changed or deleted setting will be available from next logon.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

190

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 6 Global Settings > 6.1 User Management

The procedure to add a new user is as follows:

Procedure

1 2

Click the [Setup User Account] under the [User Management] menu on the [Global Settings] tab.
The [Setup User Account] screen appears.

Click the [Add] button.

The "Add New User Account" field is displayed. When editing or deleting the user account, select the target user account from the "Registered user Account List" field, and click the [Edit] or [Delete] button.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

191

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 6 Global Settings > 6.1 User Management

Specify the following items, and click the [Apply] button.


User Name Set the user name between 4 to 16 characters. Alphanumeric characters and symbols ('! (exclamation mark)', '- (hyphen)', '_ (underscore)', and '. (period)') can be used. New Password Set the password between 4 to 16 characters. Alphanumeric characters and symbols ('! (exclamation mark)', '- (hyphen)', '_ (underscore)', and '. (period)') can be used. Confirm New Password Input the same character strings as the value entered in the "New Password" field for confirmation. User Role Select the user role from "Advanced", "Standard", and "Monitor". Select "Advanced" for the maintenance engineer account, select "Standard" for the system administrator account, and select "Monitor" for a general user account. Refer to "2.5 Operation Screens" (page 19) for available functions for each privilege. Account Select whether to "Enable" or "Disable" the user account. If the user account is disabled, that user account is registered but cannot be used. SSH Public Key Register the SSH public key used for logon authentication from CLI. When registering SSH public key, click the [Browse...] button to specify the public key. When registering a user account, an error occurs in the following conditions. - When the specified user name is already registered - When the "User Name", "New Password", and/or "Confirm New Password", are not entered - When the password does not match the confirmation password - When the user name or password is less than 4, or more than 16 characters (If 17 or more characters are entered, ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 ignores the 17th and later characters, and the password is registered using the first 16 characters only) - When the user name or password includes characters other than alphanumeric characters and symbols ('! (exclamation mark)', '- (hyphen)', '_ (underscore)', and '. (period)') When using the SSH Client Key authentication, register the SSH public key in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 and prepare the SSH secret key, corresponding to the public key in the client PC in advance. The following types (formats) of public keys can be used: - RSA for SSH1 (OpenSSH) - DSA for SSH2 (IETF) (*1) - RSA for SSH1 (IETF)
*1: Up to 1024 bytes of SSH public key file can be registered.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

192

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 6 Global Settings > 6.1 User Management

A confirmation screen appears.

Click the [OK] button.

New user account is registered in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90.

End of procedure

6.1.2

Change User Password


The [Change User Password] function changes the current user's (your) password. The procedure to change your password is as follows:

Procedure

Click the [Change User Password] under the [User Management] menu on the [Global Settings] tab.
The [Change User Password] screen appears.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

193

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 6 Global Settings > 6.1 User Management

Specify the following items, and click the [Change] button.


User Name Current user's (your) name is displayed. User Role Current user's (your) user role is displayed. Old Password Input the current password. New Password Set the new password between 4 to 16 characters. Alphanumeric characters and symbols ('! (exclamation mark)', '- (hyphen)', '_ (underscore)', and '. (period)') can be used. Confirm New Password Input the same character strings as the value entered in the "New Password" field for confirmation. When changing a user password, an error occurs in the following conditions. When the "Old Password" does not match the current password When the "New Password", "Confirm New Password", and/or "Old Password" is not entered When the password does not match the confirmation password When the password is less than 4, or more than 16 characters (If 17 or more characters are entered, ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 ignores the 17th and later characters, and the password is registered using the first 16 characters only) When the password includes characters other than alphanumeric characters and symbols ('! (exclamation mark)', '- (hyphen)', '_ (underscore)', and '. (period)')

A confirmation screen appears.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

194

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 6 Global Settings > 6.1 User Management

Click the [OK] button.

The password is changed.

End of procedure

6.1.3

Initialize User Account


The [Initialize User Account] function initializes a registered user account. By using this function, registered accounts are deleted and the default accounts (f.ce and root) revert back to factory settings. Passwords for default accounts are also restored to default settings. The procedure to initialize user account is as follows:

Procedure

1 2

Click the [Initialize User Account] under the [User Management] menu on the [Global Settings] tab.
The [Initialize User Account] screen appears.

Click the [Initialize] button.

A confirmation screen appears.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

195

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 6 Global Settings > 6.1 User Management

Click the [OK] button.

The user accounts are initialized.

End of procedure

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

196

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 6 Global Settings > 6.2 Network Settings

6.2
6.2.1

Network Settings
Setup Network Environment
Set the environment for the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 to communicate with external hosts on TCP/IP based network. The IP address, subnet mask, default gateway, DNS server of the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90, and network address for the remote operation from outside of the subnet can be set. Network environment setting is required for each MNT and RMT port. MNT port MNT port is used for general communication between ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 and external hosts. RMT port RMT port is used for communication between ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 and Remote Support center. If the IP address or the subnet mask for the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/ DX90 is changed, changing the network address (IP address or subnet mask) of the FST may be required. If the IP address of the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 becomes uncertain, refer to "ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Disk storage system User Guide" to initialize the IP address. After completing the setting, logon to GUI again. The procedure to set the network environment is as follows:

Procedure

Click the [Setup Network Environment] under the [Network Settings] menu on the [Global Settings] tab.
The [Setup Network Environment] screen appears.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

197

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 6 Global Settings > 6.2 Network Settings

Specify the following items, and click the [Set] button.


Select Network Port Select the setting target port from "MNT" or "RMT". Interface - Speed and Duplex Select the communication speed and mode from the following. Auto Negotiation 1Gbit/s 100Mbit/s Half 100Mbit/s Full 10Mbit/s Half 10Mbit/s Full - Master CM IP Address Set the IP address (0 to 255) for the Master CM (required). - Slave CM IP Address Set the IP address (0 to 255) for the Slave CM. Specify this value when duplicating the LAN path. When the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 has only one CM, a Slave IP address cannot be specified. - Subnet Mask Set the subnet mask (0 to 255) for the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Disk storage system (required). - Default Gateway Set the IP address for the default gateway (0 to 255). - Primary DNS Set the IP address for the Primary DNS server (0 to 255). - Secondary DNS Set the IP address for the Secondary DNS server (0 to 255). - http Select whether to "Enable" or "Disable" the http connection. This connection is used when accessing from GUI. - https Select whether to "Enable" or "Disable" the https connection. This connection is used when accessing from GUI. - telnet Select whether to "Enable" or "Disable" the telnet connection. This connection is used when accessing from CLI. - SSH Select whether to "Enable" or "Disable" the SSH connection. This connection is used when accessing from CLI. - Maintenance Select whether to "Enable" or "Disable" the Maintenance connection. This connection is used when accessing from the monitoring software.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

198

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 6 Global Settings > 6.2 Network Settings

- Maintenance-Secure Select whether to "Enable" or "Disable" the Maintenance-Secure connection. This connection is used when accessing from the monitoring software. This connection uses the data encryption for data transferring. - ICMP Select whether to "Enable" or "Disable" the ICMP connection. This connection is used when transferring ping command from PC. Allowed IP List The value entered in this field is enabled when the default gateway has been set. Set the destination network address (IP address and subnet mask). Up to 16 addresses can be set. Make sure to set the IP address and subnet mask in pairs. Note the following when specifying the IP address and subnet mask. - Specify the IP address using IPv4 notation (character string in d.d.d.d format based on the 256 radix system). - RMT port is used when it is required to use the dedicated network for Remote Support. IP addresses for the RMT port and MNT port must be in different subnets. - "Slave CM IP Address" is specified when connecting to the Slave CM. IP addresses for the Slave CM and Master CM must be in the same subnet. - Specify the IP address of "Default Gateway" when allowing access from outside of the subnetwork. The IP address must be in the same subnetwork as the port. - For "Allowed IP List", specify the IP address or network address that allows access to the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/ DX90. These settings are not required for access from the network address (same subnetwork) which the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 belongs to. If ports of all the protocols are disabled, access to the device is not allowed. When access to the device is not allowed, refer to "ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Disk storage systems User Guide" to reset the settings.

For the two CMs in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90, the CM that has the priority to manage the device is called the Master CM, and the other is called the Slave CM. If a CM or LAN failure occurs, ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 changes the Master CM automatically. The IP address for prior Master CM is taken over to the new Master CM. Specifying an IP address for the Slave CM enables forcible changing of the Master CM. When an error occurs and access to the Master CM is disabled, users can access the Slave CM and change the Master CM.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

199

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 6 Global Settings > 6.2 Network Settings

A confirmation screen appears.

Click the [OK] button.

The network environment is set. Device setting operation cannot be continued if the IP address is changed. Logon again with the new IP address is required.

End of procedure

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

200

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 6 Global Settings > 6.2 Network Settings

6.2.2

Setup SNMP Agent


Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is a standard protocol used by the network management of TCP/IP. This standard protocol is used to monitor the equipment connected with the network, via the network. SNMP is comprised of a monitoring part (SNMP Manager) and a monitored part (SNMP Agent). Information to be transferred with SNMP is defined in the Management Information Base (MIB), a database installed in the SNMP Agent. The equipment that configures the network is managed by transferring parameters between the SNMP Manager and SNMP Agent. SNMP uses the following five commands to request, respond to, and provide the management information between SNMP Manager and SNMP Agent. When an ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 uses the SNMP Agent environment, it is necessary to install software in the SNMP Manager. The procedure to set an SNMP Agent is as follows:

Procedure

1 2

Click the [Setup SNMP Agent] under the [Network Settings] menu on the [Global Settings] tab.
The [Setup SNMP Agent] screen appears.

Specify the following items.


Click the link on the left of the screen to display the setting fields for each item. When the entry, numbers, or characters of setting items are wrong, an error screen appears. Capital letters and lower case letters distinguish entered letters. One blank in the "Community Name" field represents two characters.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

201

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 6 Global Settings > 6.2 Network Settings

Basic Interface Specify the following items: - SNMP Function Select whether to "Enable" or "Disable" the SNMP function. - LAN Port used for SNMP When "Enable" is selected for "SNMP Function", select "MNT" or "RMT". - Authentication Failure When "Enable" is selected for "SNMP Function", select "Send SNMP Trap" or "Do not send SNMP Trap" for when authentication fails. - Abnormal parts during maintenance When reflecting an error status during maintenance, set "Notification". When not reflecting, set "Not notification".

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

202

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 6 Global Settings > 6.2 Network Settings

Community Name Community is a range of available networks for SNMP. The setting value is used as the password for SNMP Manager to access the SNMP Agent. The SNMP Agent accepts the request from the SNMP Manager when the SNMP Manager reports the same Community as the SNMP Agent's Community. The "Read Only" access privileges is added for the specified Community. Community with other access privileges cannot be specified. If no Community is specified, [public] is used as default. The following procedure describes how to set a new Community. Specify the following items, and click the [Add New Community] button. - Community Name Specify the Community name to which to transfer the trap. Between 1 and 50 alphanumeric characters, symbols ('!', '#', '$', '% (except for the first letter)', '&', '_ (underscore)', '+', '- (hyphen)', '*', and '/'), and blanks can be used (required). - IP Address Specify the IP address for the SNMP Manager. When "0.0.0.0" is specified, all hosts are accepted. - MIB View Setting Specify the MIB View name accessed by this Community (may be omitted, which will allow access to all Objects). When the SNMP server is in different subnetwork where the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 belongs, setting network address in the "Allowed IP List" described in the "6.2.1 Setup Network Environment" (page 197) is required.

The new Community is added in the "Set Community Name" field.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

203

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 6 Global Settings > 6.2 Network Settings

MIB View Setting MIB View is used for defining the accessible area in the Management Information Base (MIB) database, with a tree type structure. Use this function to release only the part of the information in the MIB. The following procedure describes how to set new MIB View. Specify the following items, and click the [Add New MIB View] button. - View Name Enter the MIB View Object ID within 60 numerals (including '.') (required). - Subtree Enter the Object ID for the subtree within 60 numerals (including '.'). A maximum of 15 subtrees can be specified at the same time.

The new MIB View is added in the "Set MIB View" field.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

204

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 6 Global Settings > 6.2 Network Settings

Trap Trap is used to report the error contents to the SNMP Manager immediately when a device error occurs. The following procedure describes how to set new destination of SNMP Trap. Specify the following items, and click the [Add New Destination] button. - IP Address Specify the IP address for the transfer destination of the Trap (required). - Community Name Specify the Community name to which to transfer the trap. Between 1 and 50 alphanumeric characters, symbols ('!', '#', '$', '% (except for the first letter)', '&', '_ (underscore)', '+', '- (hyphen)', '*', and '/'), and blanks can be used (required).

The new destination of SNMP Trap is added in the "Set Destination of SNMP Traps" field.

3 4

Click the [Set] button.


A confirmation screen appears.

Click the [OK] button.

The SNMP Agent is set.

End of procedure

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

205

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 6 Global Settings > 6.2 Network Settings

6.2.3

Download MIB File


The [Download MIB File] function exports the MIB definition file registered in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90. Management Information Base (MIB) is the information for Manager to manage Agent with Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP). This information is a database with a tree type structure. The MIB definition file is used for the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 SNMP environment settings, and for allowing other applications that use SNMP (SNMP Manager) to handle the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 (SNMP Agent). This function is necessary when the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 uses the SNMP Agent environment. The procedure to download MIB definition file is as follows:

Procedure

1 2

Click the [Download MIB File] under the [Network Settings] menu on the [Global Settings] tab.
The [Download MIB File] screen appears.

Specify the following item, and click the [Download] button.


Option Select the "The ServerView control code is added to the comment line of the MIB definition file" checkbox when downloading MIB file used for device monitoring by ServerView.

A confirmation screen appears.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

206

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 6 Global Settings > 6.2 Network Settings

Click the [OK] button.

The MIB definition file is downloaded. A screen to save the downloaded MIB definition file appears.

Save the downloaded file.


The MIB definition file is saved.

End of procedure

6.2.4

Perform SNMP Trap Test


The [Perform SNMP Trap Test] function transmits the test trap from the SNMP Agent to the SNMP Manager. The SNMP trap is the event information reported by the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 (SNMP Agent) that contains the storage system status information. Perform SNMP Agent and SNMP Manager settings before executing this test. Perform "6.2.1 Setup Network Environment" (page 197) and "6.2.2 Setup SNMP Agent" (page 201) before using this function. This function transmits a test trap. The procedure to perform SNMP trap test is as follows:

Procedure

Click the [Perform SNMP Trap Test] under the [Network Settings] menu on the [Global Settings] tab.
The [Perform SNMP Trap Test] screen appears.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

207

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 6 Global Settings > 6.2 Network Settings

Click the [Send] button.

A confirmation screen appears.

Click the [OK] button.

The SNMP trap test is performed.

End of procedure
Confirm that the trap can be normally received in the SNMP Manager after the SNMP Trap test.

6.2.5

Setup E-Mail Notification


The [Setup E-Mail Notification] function configures the E-mail Notification settings for the various events detected by the storage system. If an error occurs in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90, the E-Mail of error information is sent to the specified address. Refer to "6.4.7 Setup Event Notification" (page 243) for detailed contents of the event.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

208

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 6 Global Settings > 6.2 Network Settings

Once an E-Mail address is specified, the address cannot be deleted (the address can be changed). When stopping the event notification via E-Mail, perform one of the following procedures. Disable the "Notification E-Mail" Clear the E-Mail checkbox of the notification method in the [Setup Event Notification] function The procedure to set the E-mail notification is as follows:

Procedure

1 2

Click the [Setup E-Mail Notification] under the [Network Settings] menu on the [Global Settings] tab.
The [Setup E-Mail Notification] screen appears.

Specify the following items.


Click the link on the left of the screen to display the setting fields for each item. Notification E-Mail - Notification E-Mail Select whether to "Enable" or "Disable" the E-Mail send function. - Destination E-Mail Address Specify the E-Mail destination address. Up to five addresses can be registered. - Comment Input the message (comment) to be added to the E-Mail. Up to 255 alphanumeric characters, symbols, and blanks within 10 lines can be used.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

209

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 6 Global Settings > 6.2 Network Settings

Click the [Send Test E-Mail] button to confirm that an E-Mail can be sent to the specified address. When sending a test E-Mail, select "Enable" for the "Notification E-Mail" setting. Note that clicking [Set] button is required when changing the parameters before sending a test E-Mail to enable the new settings. Mail Server Settings - LAN Port used for SMTP Connection Select the LAN port connecting to the SMTP server from "MNT" or "RMT". - Sender E-Mail Address Input the mail sender E-Mail address. - SMTP Server Specify the IP address or domain name of the SMTP server to be used. - SMTP Port No. Input the port number used by the SMTP server. - SMTP requires authentication Select the user authorization method to connect to the SMTP server from "None" or "AUTH SMTP". - User Name If "AUTH SMTP" is selected for "SMTP requires authentication", input the sender user name. - Password If "AUTH SMTP" is selected for "SMTP requires authentication", input the sender password. - Authentication Method If "AUTH SMTP" is selected for "SMTP requires authentication", select the authentication method from "Automatic", "CRAM-MD5", "PLAIN", or "LOGIN".

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

210

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 6 Global Settings > 6.2 Network Settings

Retry Setting - Maximum Retries Input the maximum number of retry ("0" or "1"). - Retry Interval (sec.) Specify the interval between retry (0 to 5) in units of seconds.

3 4

Click the [Set] button.


A confirmation screen appears.

Click the [OK] button.

The specified send E-mail setting is registered.

End of procedure

6.2.6

Display SMTP Log


The [Display SMTP Log] function displays the SMTP log between the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/ DX90 and the server. If the E-Mail communication is not working normally, this function may identify the cause of problem. SMTP log contains request from the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 to the server and response from the server to the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90. Note that this function displays the SMTP log for the latest event. Perform "6.2.5 Setup E-Mail Notification" (page 208) in advance.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

211

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 6 Global Settings > 6.2 Network Settings

The procedure to display SMTP log is as follows:

Procedure

1 2

Click the [Display SMTP Log] under the [Network Settings] menu on the [Global Settings] tab.
The [Display SMTP Log] screen appears.

Check the displayed "Event Type" and "Communication Log".

Click the [Refresh] button to obtain the latest information.

End of procedure

6.2.7

Renew SSL Certificate


The [Renew SSL Certificate] function renews the unique SSL certificate for secure communication. The data transmitted in the network may be intercepted from a third party. This function creates the SSL certificate again, and prevents the impersonation caused by SSL certificate theft. The procedure to create SSL certificate is as follows: When renewing the SSL certificate, Web GUI cannot be used until the renewal process has completed. Wait a few minutes before starting the next operation. Re-install the web-site certificate in the web browser using the procedure described in "Appendix A Install Site Certificate" (page 301) as required.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

212

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 6 Global Settings > 6.2 Network Settings

Procedure

1 2

Click the [Renew SSL Certificate] under the [Network Settings] menu on the [Global Settings] tab.
The [Renew SSL Certificate] screen appears.

Click the [Create] button.

A confirmation screen appears.

Click the [OK] button.

The SSL certificate is created.

End of procedure

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

213

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 6 Global Settings > 6.3 Remote Support

6.3

Remote Support
The [Remote Support] setting menu registers user information related to the ETERNUS DX60/ DX80/DX90, and settings for Remote support function to REMCS (REMote Customer Support system) center and the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90. REMCS, a unique remote maintenance system by Fujitsu, provides the following maintenance functions. Failure Notice This function reports various failures that occur in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 to the REMCS center. The maintenance engineer is notified of a failure immediately. Information Transfer This function sends information such as logs and configuration information to be used when checking a failure. It reduces time required to collect information for the REMCS center.

6.3.1

Display Support Information


The [Display Support Information] function checks the Remote Support function settings and operation status. The procedure to check the display support information is as follows:

Procedure

1 2

Click the [Display Support Information] under the [Remote Support] menu on the [Global Settings] tab.
The [Display Support Information] screen appears.

Check the displayed "Support Information" and "Event Information".

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

214

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 6 Global Settings > 6.3 Remote Support

Click the [Refresh] button to obtain the latest information.

End of procedure

6.3.2

Display Communication Log


This function displays the communication log when the Remote Support function is operated between the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 and the server. When the Remote Support function cannot be operated properly, for example, cannot be connected to the REMCS center, use this log to identify the cause of the problem. The communication log includes requests from the device to the server, and responses from the server to the device. Only the communication log of the last executed event is displayed. Setting the server connection in advance is necessary.

The procedure to display the communication log is as follows:

Procedure

1 2

Click the [Display Communication Log] under the [Remote Support] menu on the [Global Settings] tab.
The [Display Communication Log] screen appears.

Check the displayed "Event Type" and the "Communication Log".

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

215

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 6 Global Settings > 6.3 Remote Support

Click the [Refresh] button to obtain the latest information.

End of procedure

6.3.3

Setup Remote Support


The [Setup Remote Support] function registers the customer information and communication environment information required to be given to Remote Support from the REMCS center. When changing the registered information, use the descriptions in "6.3.4 Update Customer Information" (page 224) and "6.3.5 Update Communication Environment Information" (page 226). The Remote Support setting information file (customer information file and communication environment information file) created by using REMCS Environment Setup Assist Tool (REMCS ESAT) can be imported to the device, to simplify the input operation required to be set for each device. The procedure to set the Remote Support is as follows:

Procedure

1 2

Click the [Setup Remote Support] under the [Remote Support] menu on the [Global Settings] tab.
The [Setup Remote Support] screen appears.

Specify the following items.


When importing Remote Support settings to the ETERNUS DX60/ DX80/DX90 all at once, click the [Browse...] button to specify the location where the settings file has been stored, and click the [Import] button. Customer Information Customer information saved in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 can be deleted after transmitting the information to the REMCS center. Select the "Delete any Customer Identity information from the storage system after the information is sent to the "REMCS Center"." checkbox to delete the information. - Detailed Settings Company Name Input the company name that owns ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 (required). Up to 60 alphanumeric characters can be used. Department/Division Input the department or division that owns ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90. Up to 40 alphanumeric characters can be used.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

216

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 6 Global Settings > 6.3 Remote Support

Address Input the address of the company that owns ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 (required). Up to 60 alphanumeric characters can be used. Building Name Input the building name where the company that owns ETERNUS DX60/DX80/ DX90 is located. Up to 40 alphanumeric characters can be used. Administrator Name Input the system administrator's name that manages the ETERNUS DX60/ DX80/DX90 (required). Up to 40 alphanumeric characters and symbols can be used. Administrator E-Mail Address Input the E-mail address of the system administrator who manages the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 (required). Up to 40 alphanumeric characters (including symbols) can be used. Postal Code (Zip Code) Input the post code for the company that owns ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90. Up to 10 alphanumeric characters (including symbols) can be used. Phone Number Input the phone number for the company that owns ETERNUS DX60/DX80/ DX90 (required). Up to 20 alphanumeric characters (including symbols) can be used. FAX Number Input the FAX number for the company that owns ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90. Up to 20 alphanumeric characters (including symbols) can be used. Storage System Unique Name Input the nickname for the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90. Up to 32 alphanumeric characters (including symbols) can be used. Country of Installation (ISO3166 A2) Example: JP, US, DE, etc. Input the country code for the country where the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 is located (required). Capital letters or 99 can be entered. - Installation Location Address Input the address where the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 locates. Up to 60 alphanumeric characters can be used. Building Name Input the building name where the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 is located. Up to 40 alphanumeric characters can be used. - Information filled by Field Engineers Installation Date Input the date when the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 is installed. Numerals can be used. Field Engineer E-Mail Address Input the mail address for the field engineer who installed the ETERNUS DX60/ DX80/DX90. Up to 60 alphanumeric characters and symbols can be used. Customer Code Input the customer code. Up to 8 numerals (including symbols) can be used.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

217

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 6 Global Settings > 6.3 Remote Support

Communication Environment Information - Connection Connection Type Select the connection method when using the REMCS operation. - Internet Connection - Internet Connection (Mail only) - P-P Connection - P-P Connection (Mail only) - P-P Connection (VPN Connection) - P-P Connection (VPN Connection Mail only) LAN Port used for Remote Support Select the device LAN port used for REMCS operation from "MNT" or "RMT". - Service Scheduled Connection Time Input the time for scheduled REMCS connection (required). Numerals can be used. Scheduled Connection Period Select the term for scheduled REMCS connection (required). - Every Day - Every Day (except Sunday) - Every Day (except Saturday and Sunday) - Once per Week Specify the Day of the Week When "Once per Week" is selected for "Scheduled Connection Period", select the day of the week for scheduled REMCS connection. - Sunday - Monday - Tuesday - Wednesday - Thursday - Friday - Saturday - Proxy Server Proxy Server Input the IP address or domain name for the proxy server used for REMCS operation. Up to 63 alphanumeric characters and symbols can be used. Port No. Input the port number for the proxy server. Numerals between 0 and 65535 can be used. User Name Input the user name when using the proxy server. Up to 31 ASCII codes (alphanumeric characters and symbols) can be used. Password Input the password for when using the proxy server. Up to 31 ASCII codes (alphanumeric characters and symbols) can be used.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

218

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 6 Global Settings > 6.3 Remote Support

- Storage System E-Mail Configuration SMTP Server Input the IP address or domain name for the SMTP server used for REMCS operation (required). Up to 63 alphanumeric characters and symbols can be used. Port No. Input the port number for the SMTP server (required). Numerals between 0 and 65535 can be used. Sender Mail Address Input an address for mails sent by the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 for REMCS operations (required). Up to 63 alphanumeric characters and symbols can be used. - SMTP Authentication Information Authentication Type Select the SMTP authentication method. - No SMTP Authentication - POP Before SMTP Authentication - AUTH SMTP Authentication Authentication Method When the "Authentication Type" is "AUTH SMTP Authentication", specify the Authentication Method. - Automatic - CRAM-MD5 - PLAIN - LOGIN POP Server When the "Authentication Type" is "POP Before SMTP Authentication", specify the dom ain name or IP address for the POP server used for SMTP Authentication. Up to 63 alphanumeric characters and symbols can be used. Port No. Input the port number for the POP server. Numerals between 0 and 65535 can be used. User Name Input the user name when using the POP server. Up to 31 alphanumeric characters and symbols can be used. Password Input the password when using the POP server. Up to 31 alphanumeric characters and symbols can be used.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

219

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 6 Global Settings > 6.3 Remote Support

- REMCS Center REMCS Center Select the REMCS center where the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 is connected (required). - Fujitsu America - Australia - Brazil - Hong-Kong - China - Indonesia - Korea - Malaysia - Philippine - Singapore - Taiwan - Thailand - Vietnam - Individual support in Hawaii - OSC - Direct Input Setting HTTP Server If "Direct Input Setting" is selected for "REMCS Center" field, input the IP address or domain name for the destination HTTP server. Up to 63 alphanumeric characters and symbols can be used. Port No. Input the port number for the HTTP server specified above. Numerals between 0 and 65535 can be used. Receiver Mail Address When "Direct Input Setting" is selected, input the E-mail address for the REMCS center specified above as a report destination of the REMCS operation. Up to 63 alphanumeric characters and symbols can be used. Detailed Configuration Information - Mail Message Fragmentation Setting Select whether to "Enable Message Fragmentation" or "Disable Message Fragmentation" into the specified size. If splitting the mail, specify the units in which to split the mail, between 64 and 6400 (KB). - Specify Storage System Name for HELO/EHLO Announcement when Sending Mail Select whether to "Specify" or "Do not specify" the storage system name for HELO/ EHLP announcement when sending mail. If "Specify" is selected, input the storage system name. Up to 32 alphanumeric characters and symbols can be used.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

220

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 6 Global Settings > 6.3 Remote Support

Time Information This item is not required for setting. If changing the setting values, select the "Change following Timing Parameter items" checkbox. - SMTP Response Timeout (sec.) Input the timeout limit when using SMTP connection. Numerals between 1 and 3600 can be used. - SMTP Retry Count Input the retry number of SMTP. Numerals between 1 and 60 can be used. - SMTP Retry Interval (sec.) Input the intervals for retrying SMTP. Numerals between 1 and 3600 can be used. - HTTP Timeout (sec.) Input the timeout limit when using HTTP connection. Numerals between 1 and 3600 can be used. - HTTP Retry Count Input the retry number of HTTP. Numerals between 1 and 60 can be used. - HTTP Retry Interval (sec.) Input the intervals for retrying HTTP. Numerals between 1 and 3600 can be used. - Queue Time before Sending Mails (msec.) (only when POP Before SMTP authentication is enabled) Input the waiting time for sending mail. Numerals between 1 and 3600 can be used. - [Setup Remote Support] screen (1/5)

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

221

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 6 Global Settings > 6.3 Remote Support

- [Setup Remote Support] screen (2/5)

- [Setup Remote Support] screen (3/5)

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

222

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 6 Global Settings > 6.3 Remote Support

- [Setup Remote Support] screen (4/5)

- [Setup Remote Support] screen (5/5)

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

223

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 6 Global Settings > 6.3 Remote Support

Click the [Set] button.


A confirmation screen appears. In the following conditions, an error screen appears. Click the [Set] button without setting the required item (items with "*") Click the [Set] button with invalid values When the selected setting information file is not correct When file format of the selected setting information file is not correct

Click the [OK] button.

The specified Remote Support setting is registered.

End of procedure
After completing the setting, the REMCS center sends the setting result to the specified "Administrator E-Mail Address". Make sure to confirm the settings.

6.3.4

Update Customer Information


The [Update Customer Information] function changes the customer information specified in "6.3.3 Setup Remote Support" (page 216). Customer information saved in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 can be deleted after transmitting the information to the REMCS center. Select the "Delete any Customer Identity information from the storage system after the information is sent to the "REMCS Center"." and then delete personal information saved in device" checkbox to delete the information. The Remote Support setting information file (customer information file) created by using REMCS Environment Setup Assist Tool (REMCS ESAT) can be imported to the device, to simplify the input operation required to be set for each device.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

224

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 6 Global Settings > 6.3 Remote Support

The procedure to change the customer information is as follows:

Procedure

1 2

Click the [Update Customer Information] under the [Remote Support] menu on the [Global Settings] tab.
The [Update Customer Information] screen appears.

Set the customer information again.


When importing customer information to the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/ DX90 all at once, click the [Browse...] button to specify the location where the settings file has been stored, and click the [Import] button. - [Update Customer Information] screen (1/2)

- [Update Customer Information] screen (2/2)

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

225

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 6 Global Settings > 6.3 Remote Support

3 4

Click the [Set] button.


A confirmation screen appears.

Click the [OK] button.

The customer information is changed.

End of procedure

6.3.5

Update Communication Environment Information


The [Update Communication Environment Information] function changes the communication environment information specified in the "6.3.3 Setup Remote Support" (page 216). The Remote Support setting information file (communication environment information file) created by using REMCS Environment Setup Assist Tool (REMCS ESAT) can be imported to the device, to simplify the input operation required to be set for each device. The procedure to update communication environment information is as follows:

Procedure

1 2

Click the [Update Communication Environment Information] under the [Remote Support] menu on the [Global Settings] tab.
The [Update Communication Environment Information] screen appears.

Set the communication environment information again.


When importing communication environment information to the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 all at once, click the [Browse...] button to specify the location where the settings file has been stored, and click the [Import] button.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

226

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 6 Global Settings > 6.3 Remote Support

- [Update Communication Environment Information] screen (1/3)

- [Update Communication Environment Information] screen (2/3)

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

227

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 6 Global Settings > 6.3 Remote Support

- [Update Communication Environment Information] screen (3/3)

3 4

Click the [Set] button.


A confirmation screen appears.

Click the [OK] button.

The communication environment information is changed.

End of procedure

6.3.6

Setup Log Sending Parameters


The [Setup Log Sending Parameters] function transfers the internal log to the REMCS center. Select "Configure Automatic Log Transmission" or "Immediately Send Log Manually". Configure Automatic Log Transmission ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 sends the log automatically. Immediately Send Log Manually Send log manually.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

228

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 6 Global Settings > 6.3 Remote Support

This function is not available in the following conditions: When "6.3.3 Setup Remote Support" (page 216) is not finished When a problem is detected in the Remote Support settings When the "Receiver Mail Address" (REMCS center) is not specified for the Remote Support When the Remote support function is "Stopping" (refer to "6.3.7 Stop/ Restart Remote Support" (page 231)) The procedure to send log is as follows:

Configure Automatic Log Transmission

Procedure

1 2 3

Click the [Setup Log Sending Parameters] under the [Remote Support] menu on the [Global Settings] tab.
The [Setup Log Sending Parameters] screen appears.

Click the [Configure Automatic Log Transmission] link on the left of the screen. Specify the following items, and click the [Set] button.
Send Log based on Events To send logs automatically in the case of a failure, select the "Send" checkbox. Send Log Periodically To send logs on regular basis. Select the "Enable Periodical Transmission of Log." checkbox, and specify time, period, and day of the week.

A confirmation screen appears.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

229

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 6 Global Settings > 6.3 Remote Support

Click the [OK] button.

The send log (Configure Automatic Log Transmission) is performed.

End of procedure

Immediately Send Log Manually

Procedure

1 2 3

Click the [Setup Log Sending Parameters] under the [Remote Support] menu on the [Global Settings] tab.
The [Setup Log Sending Parameters] screen appears.

Click the [Immediately Send Log Manually] link on the left of the screen. Specify the following items, and click the [Run] button.
Incident Number Specify the incident number of the manually sent log. Expander Log Collection To obtain the Expander log, select the "Collect" checkbox. Time Range Specified To specify the time to send log, select the "Specify" checkbox, and specify the start and end time.

A confirmation screen appears.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

230

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 6 Global Settings > 6.3 Remote Support

Click the [OK] button.

The send log (Immediately Send Log Manually) operation is performed.

End of procedure

6.3.7

Stop/Restart Remote Support


The [Stop/Restart Remote Support] function stops or restarts the Remote Support. This function is used for long time suspension such as relocating the system. When suspending the Remote Support function, the device support status is changed from "Operating" to "Stopping". When restarting the Remote Support function, the device support status is changed from "Stopping" to "Operating". When in the "Stopping", all Remote Support functions, such as automatic notification of device errors to the REMCS center, are stopped. Perform "6.3.3 Setup Remote Support" (page 216) in advance. This function is not available when the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 is in "Maintenance". The event of stopping or restarting the Remote Support function is transferred from the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 to the REMCS center. The procedure to stop or restart the Remote Support is as follows:

Procedure

Click the [Stop/Restart Remote Support] under the [Remote Support] menu on the [Global Settings] tab.
The [Stop/Restart Remote Support] screen appears.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

231

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 6 Global Settings > 6.3 Remote Support

Click the [Stop] or [Restart] button.

A confirmation screen appears.

Click the [OK] button.

The stopping/restarting Remote Support is performed.

End of procedure

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

232

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 6 Global Settings > 6.4 System Settings

6.4
6.4.1

System Settings
Modify Date and Time
The [Modify Date and Time] function is used to set the time/date and time zone (device location) of the internal clock. The clock is used for checking the internal log and Eco-mode, etc. of the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/ DX90. This function is used when moving the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 to a new installation site, and/or changing the device date/time. The time zone setting is used for Remote Support function. It is possible to set the NTP server to automatically set the time. If an NTP function cannot be used, resetting the time once a month is recommended. When using Eco-mode, make sure to set the time/date correctly. If the time/date of the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 is wrong, processes used for stopping and starting the disk motor cannot be performed per the Eco-mode schedule. When using the NTP server, the time modification method is step mode (modify immediately). The procedure to modify date and time is as follows:

Procedure

1 2

Click the [Modify Date and Time] under the [System Settings] menu on the [Global Settings] tab.
The [Modify Date and Time] screen appears.

Specify the following items, and click the [Set] button.


Date/Time Information - Current Time Current date and time setting is displayed. - Date To change the "Current Time", input the new date and time. Time Zone Set the time difference (GMT). - Time Zone Select the Time Zone from the list box. If the appropriate Time Zone does not exist, select "Manually", and specify the time difference using "+" or "-", hour, and minute. Daylight Saving Time - Set Select whether to set the Daylight Saving Time "ON" or "OFF" with the radio button. - Range If "Set" is "ON", set the Daylight Saving Time period. Select "by day of the week" or "by Date" with the radio button, and input the required parameters.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

233

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 6 Global Settings > 6.4 System Settings

When selecting "by day of the week", the "Last" can be selected to specify the start or end week. When selecting "by Date", the "Last Date" can be selected to specify the start or end date. NTP Service - NTP server Select "NTP enabled" or "NTP disabled" with the radio button. When NTP is enabled, input the IP address or domain name for the NTP server in the text box. ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 is synchronized with the NTP server in a step mode fashion. - LAN Port used for NTP Select the LAN port to be used for NTP connection from "MNT" or "RMT". - Access Status Access state to the NTP server is displayed.

A confirmation screen appears.

Click the [OK] button.

The date and time setting is set.

End of procedure

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

234

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 6 Global Settings > 6.4 System Settings

6.4.2

Modify Storage System Name


The [Modify Storage System Name] function is used to set the name, administrator, and installation site of the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Disk storage system. Information registered in this screen is used for the following functions and screens: Network management using SNMP Storage system name displayed in logon screen and operation screens Friendly Name (storage system name)(*1) for Virtual Disk Service (VDS)
*1: VDS is a storage management function of the Windows Server.

The procedure to register the storage system name is as follows:

Procedure

1 2

Click the [Modify Storage System Name] under the [System Settings] menu on the [Global Settings] tab.
The [Modify Storage System Name] screen appears.

Specify the following items, and click the [Set] button.


Name Specify the storage system name. Between 1 and 16 alphanumeric characters, symbols (except ', (comma)' '% used as the first letter'), and blanks can be used. Installation Location Specify the installation location of the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90. Between 1 and 50 alphanumeric characters, symbols (except ', (comma)' '% used as the first letter'), and blanks can be used. Administrator Specify the system administrator name Between 1 and 50 alphanumeric characters, symbols (except ', (comma)' '% used as the first letter'), and blanks can be used. Description Specify the description of the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90. Between 1 and 50 alphanumeric characters, symbols (except ', (comma)' '% used as the first letter'), and blanks can be used.

and '?', and

and '?', and

and '?', and

and '?', and

When changing the storage system name, all the parameters in this menu must be set. Once a parameter value is specified, the parameter cannot be deleted (values can be changed).

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

235

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 6 Global Settings > 6.4 System Settings

A confirmation screen appears.

Click the [OK] button.

The specified storage system name is registered.

End of procedure

6.4.3

Setup Encryption Mode


The [Setup Encryption Mode] function enables or disables encryption mode. When encryption mode is enabled, an encryption buffer is secured in the cache memory of the controller module.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

236

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 6 Global Settings > 6.4 System Settings

When the "Setup Encryption Mode" is not displayed in the menu, the encryption function is not available. Encryption related functions are only available after enabling encryption mode. When disabling the encryption mode, reboot the ETERNUS DX60/ DX80/DX90. The encryption buffer capacity for each controller module (CM0/CM1) is 76MB for ETERNUS DX60, and 230MB for ETERNUS DX80/DX90. Once encrypted, volumes cannot be changed to non-encrypted volumes. When disabling the encryption mode, delete all the encrypted volumes and volumes being encrypted in advance. Encryption function cannot be used under the following conditions: - Encrypted volumes exist - Volumes being encrypted exist - Required cache memory capacity cannot be secured for enabling the encryption mode The procedure to set the encryption mode is as follows:

Procedure

1 2

Click the [Setup Encryption Mode] under the [System Settings] menu on the [Global Settings] tab.
The [Setup Encryption Mode] screen appears.

Select whether to "Enable" or "Disable" encryption mode, and click the [Set] button.

A confirmation screen appears.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

237

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 6 Global Settings > 6.4 System Settings

Click the [OK] button.

The encryption mode is set.

End of procedure

6.4.4

Change Box ID
The [Change Box ID] function changes the Box ID that identifies an ETERNUS DX60/DX80/ DX90 in the user system. Box ID is used as information to identify the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 from applications connected to the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90. The initial Box ID is a device ID that is created by combining device information (series name, model, serial number, etc.). If upgrading or replacing the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90, the existing Box ID will change with the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 change. Therefore, there is a risk that the backup data saved in the previous ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 cannot be used, so it is necessary to reconfigure the user system after the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 is upgraded or replaced. This function changes the device BOX ID to the same ID as that of the previous ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 in order to avoid any problems and also use the same backup data in the new device. A Box ID is a unique name in the user system. Make the Box ID different from that of other ETERNUS Disk storage systems in the user system. If the Box ID is not changed, the Device ID is used as a Box ID. You cannot change the Box ID during Advanced Copy or RAID migration. The procedure to change Box ID is as follows:

Procedure

Click the [Change Box ID] under the [System Settings] menu on the [Global Settings] tab.
The [Change Box ID] screen appears.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

238

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 6 Global Settings > 6.4 System Settings

Input the Box ID and click the [Set] button.


Set the Box ID with 40 characters. Alphabetic characters (upper case), numerals, blanks, and hash key characters (#) can be used. In the following conditions, a Box ID cannot be set. When a Box ID is not entered When the input value of a Box ID is less than 40 characters When the entered value of a Box ID is not alphabetic characters (upper case), numerals, blanks, or hash key characters (#)

A confirmation screen appears.

Click the [OK] button.

The specified Box ID is registered.

End of procedure

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

239

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 6 Global Settings > 6.4 System Settings

6.4.5

Setup Power Management


The [Setup Power Management] function connects the external input device and controls (shuts down) the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 power. When using power management function, the AUTO POWER switch (AC power interlock mode) setting as well as GUI setting for ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 is required. Refer to "ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Disk storage system User Guide" for details. If this function is enabled by mistake, the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 may shut down unexpectedly. The procedure to set the power management is as follows:

Procedure

1 2

Click the [Setup Power Management] under the [System Settings] menu on the [Global Settings] tab.
The [Setup Power Management] screen appears.

Specify the following items, and click the [Set] button.


Enable Select the controller module to enable power management by an external input device (both checkbox can be selected at the same time). - CM#0 - CM#1 When the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 has only one CM, CM#1 cannot be selected. Delay until Shutdown (min.) Set the delay time before starting shutdown after receiving a battery low signal between 0 and 15 (minutes). Set management unit interface Select the device connecting via RS232C interface. The "Manual" setting is for particular use, thus should not be used during normal operation. - Power Synchronized Unit - PMAN - Manual Power Failure Signal Select the signal logic for power failure signal when the power failure occurs (Positive: positive logic, Negative: negative logic). Low Battery Signal Select the signal logic for a low battery signal when a low battery charge occurs (Positive: positive logic, Negative: negative logic).

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

240

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 6 Global Settings > 6.4 System Settings

UPS Shutdown Signal When enabling the UPS shutdown signal, select the "Enable" checkbox. Also, select the signal logic for UPS shutdown signal (Positive: positive logic, Negative: negative logic).

A confirmation screen appears.

Click the [OK] button.

The power management setting is set.

End of procedure

6.4.6

Setup Subsystem Parameters


The [Setup Subsystem Parameters] function changes the subsystem parameters in order to control ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 operation when it is connected to hosts. The ETERNUS DX60/ DX80/DX90 operates according to the set subsystem parameters, for all the hosts to be connected. Do not change the setting after installing the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/ DX90, unless a maintenance engineer instructs otherwise. To set the subsystem parameters using this function, set them after stopping all host access.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

241

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 6 Global Settings > 6.4 System Settings

The procedure to set the subsystem parameters are as follows:

Procedure

1 2

Click the [Setup Subsystem Parameters] under the [System Settings] menu on the [Global Settings] tab.
The [Setup Subsystem Parameters] screen appears.

Specify the following item, and click the [Set] button.


Load Balance Set whether to enable the load balance for the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90. Select the checkbox to enable the load balance. When the load balance is enabled and the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 is overloaded, the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 answers the sense specified in the "Load Balance Response" field of the [Setup Host Response] function. If the load balance is disabled, the warning sense response is suppressed and the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 does not answer the sense of any host connecting to the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90. Load balance for all hosts is disabled when the "Load Balance" checkbox is cleared. If the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/ DX90 is in overload in this status, the warning sense response is suppressed. When connecting the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 and HPUX hosts, clear (disable) the "Load Balance" checkbox. If the "Load Balance" checkbox is selected (enabled), incorrect logs may be recorded in the host. Load balancing by Multipath Driver is operated regardless if the "Load Balance" is enabled/disabled. Reject INQUIRY from Unauthorized Host Select whether to reject the "Inquiry" command from an unauthorized host. Select the checkbox to reject the "Inquiry" command from an unauthorized host. When rejecting the command, the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 returns an Affinity Error (5/25/81) for the "Inquiry" command from the unauthorized host. When not rejecting the command, the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 responds normally. W h e n u s i n g t h e V E R I TA S Vo l u m e M a n a g e r D y n a m i c Multipathing (VxVM DMP), select the checkbox.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

242

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 6 Global Settings > 6.4 System Settings

A confirmation screen appears.

Click the [OK] button.

The subsystem parameters are set.

6.4.7

Setup Event Notification


The [Setup Event Notification] function selects whether to report events detected in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90. There are four methods for event notification: E-Mail, SNMP Trap, Host Sense, and REMCS. For E-Mail notification, performing "6.2.5 Setup E-Mail Notification" (page 208) is required. For SNMP Trap notification, performing "6.2.2 Setup SNMP Agent" (page 201) is required. For REMCS for event notification, performing "6.3.3 Setup Remote Support" (page 216) is required. A notification setting can be selected for each type of event. When selecting REMCS for event notification, only the REC related error event settings can be changed. Note that REMCS field is not displayed for the ETERNUS DX60/DX80.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

243

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 6 Global Settings > 6.4 System Settings

The procedure to set the event notification is as follows:

Procedure

1 2

Click the [Setup Event Notification] under the [System Settings] menu on the [Global Settings] tab.
The [Setup Event Notification] screen appears.

Select whether or not to report for each event type.


The events are classified into three levels: "Error Severity Level", "Warning Level", and "Informational Level". Click the link on the left of the screen to display the setting fields for each level. Some notification methods cannot be selected depending on the event type. Setting based on Severity Select whether to notify of an event by levels. When enabling the notification, select the method from "E-Mail", "SNMP Trap", "Host Sense Key Code Qualifier", or "REMCS" (for ETERNUS DX90) (multiple selections can be made). When setting the notification method for each event, move on to the setting fields for each level. - All Error Events Select whether to notify when an error level event occurs. When notifying, select the notification method. - All Warning Events Select whether to notify when a warning level event occurs. When notifying, select the notification method. - All Informational Events Select whether to notify when a informational level event occurs. When notifying, select the notification method. - Individual Settings within Severity Level "Yes" is displayed when the target notification method ("E-Mail", "SNMP Trap", "Host Sense Key Code Qualifier", or "REMCS" (for ETERNUS DX90)) is specified for any event in "Error Severity Level", "Warning Level", or "Information Level", if not, "No" is displayed.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

244

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 6 Global Settings > 6.4 System Settings

Error Severity Level Select whether to notify of the error event for each event type. "Remote Path Error", "REC Buffer Halt (Path Error)", "REC Buffer Halt (Overload)", and "REC Buffer Halt (Error)" are displayed only when using the ETERNUS DX90. When enabling the notification, select the method from "E-Mail", "SNMP Trap", "Host Sense Key Code Qualifier", or "REMCS" (for ETERNUS DX90) (multiple selections can be made). - Disk was broken Select whether to notify when a disk failure occurs. When notifying, select the notification method. - Broken Disk (when HS<0) Select whether to notify when a disk failure occurs but no hot spare disk is registered. When notifying, select the notification method. - Module was broken Select whether to notify when a module failure occurs. When notifying, select the notification method. - Remote Path Error Select whether to notify when an REC path error occurs. When notifying, select the notification method. - REC Buffer Halt (Path Error) Select whether to notify when an REC buffer halt caused by REC path error occurs. When notifying, select the notification method. - REC Buffer Halt (Overload) Select whether to notify when an REC buffer halt caused by overload occurs. When notifying, select the notification method. - REC Buffer Halt (Error) Select whether to notify when an REC buffer halt caused by an error occurs. When notifying, select the notification method.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

245

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 6 Global Settings > 6.4 System Settings

Warning Level Select whether to notify of a warning event for each event type. When enabling the notification, select the method from "E-Mail", "SNMP Trap", "Host Sense Key Code Qualifier", or "REMCS" (for ETERNUS DX90) (multiple selections can be made). - Disk reported a Warning Select whether to notify when a warning level event occurs in the disk. When notifying, select the notification method. - Warning Disk (when HS<0) Select whether to notify when a warning level event occurs in the disk but no hot spare disk is registered. When notifying, select the notification method. - Module reported a Warning Select whether to notify when a warning level event occurs in the module. When notifying, select the notification method. - RAID Degradation Event Select whether to notify when a RAID degradation event occurs. When notifying, select the notification method. - RAID Degradation Event (when HS<0) Select whether to notify when a RAID degradation event occurs but no hot spare disk is registered. When notifying, select the notification method. - RAID Recovery Event Select whether to notify when a degraded RAID group is recovered. When notifying, select the notification method. - Recovery from Error Select whether to notify when recovered from an error status. When notifying, select the notification method. - Blink Panel Fault LED Select "Enable" when setting the Fault LED in the front panel to blink while a warning level event occurs, and select "Disable" when setting the Fault LED not to blink.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

246

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 6 Global Settings > 6.4 System Settings

Informational Level Select whether to notify of an information event for each event type. When notification is enabled, select the method from "E-Mail" or "SNMP Trap" (both settings can be selected). - Power on Completed Select whether to notify when the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 startup has completed. When notifying, select the notification method. - Controller Firmware updated Select whether to notify when the controller firmware has been updated. When notifying, select the notification method. - Created RAID Group Select whether to notify when the RAID group has been created. When notifying, select the notification method. - Deleted RAID Group Select whether to notify when the RAID group has been deleted. When notifying, select the notification method. - RAID Group Name Changed Select whether to notify when the RAID group name has been changed. When notifying, select the notification method. - Assigned Hot Spare Select whether to notify when the hot spare has been registered. When notifying, select the notification method. - Released Hot Spare Select whether to notify when the hot spare has been released. When notifying, select the notification method. - Created Volume Select whether to notify when the volume has been created. When notifying, select the notification method. - Deleted Volume Select whether to notify when the volume has been deleted. When notifying, select the notification method.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

247

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 6 Global Settings > 6.4 System Settings

- Volume Name Changed Select whether to notify when the volume name has been changed. When notifying, select the notification method. - FC / iSCSI / SAS Port Parameters Changed Select whether to notify when the port parameters have been changed. When notifying, select the notification method. Displayed content varies depending on the model type. - FC / iSCSI / SAS Host Information Changed Select whether to notify when the host information has been changed. When notifying, select the notification method. Displayed content varies depending on the model type. - Host Name Defined Select whether to notify when the host name has been defined. When notifying, select the notification method. - LUN Mapping Changed Select whether to notify when the LUN mapping has been changed. When notifying, select the notification method. - Host Response Changed Select whether to notify when the host response has been changed. When notifying, select the notification method. - Reset Group Changed Select whether to notify when the reset group has been changed. When notifying, select the notification method. - Error condition defined by SDP policy Select whether to notify when an error level event occurs in the SDP policy. When notifying, select the notification method. - Warning condition defined by SDP policy Select whether to notify when a warning level event occurs in the SDP policy. When notifying, select the notification method. - Informational message defined by SDP policy Select whether to notify when an informational level event occurs in the SDP policy. When notifying, select the notification method.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

248

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 6 Global Settings > 6.4 System Settings

Threshold of SDP policy level can be specified with "5.4.4 Modify Copy Parameters" (page 155) function.

3 4

Click the [Set] button.


A confirmation screen appears.

Click the [OK] button.

The specified event notification setting is enabled.

End of procedure

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

249

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 6 Global Settings > 6.5 Host I/F Management

6.5

Host I/F Management


Host I/F Management provides the following host connection related functions. Set Port Parameters Setup Host Setup Host Response Modify Reset Group ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 can relate the Logical Unit Number (LUN) of the host to volumes in the device, and set or limit the volume that is recognized from the host. Host Affinity relates the LUN and volume to each interface port connected in the host.

When using Host Affinity function


The [Host I/F Management] is used when connecting multiple servers via a switch. The server recognizes the affinity group specified for each Host Bus Adapter (HBA). By restricting the volumes can be recognized from each server, security improvement is expected. The following shows a basic concept for affinity group.
Apply Affinity Group #00 for the access from HBA#A (=Server A) and HBA#B (=Server B)

Restrict the server that can be accessed per port LUN#0

ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90

Switch
: Server A HBA#A LUN#127 Affinity Group #00

Port

LUN#0 : LUN#127

Volume#0 : Volume#127

LUN#0 : Server B HBA#B LUN#127 Affinity Group #01 LUN#0 Volume#128 : Volume#255

Port

: LUN#127

LUN#0 : Server C HBA#C LUN#127 Apply Affinity Group #01 for the access from HBA#C(=Server C)

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

250

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 6 Global Settings > 6.5 Host I/F Management

When Host Affinity function is not used


When the host affinity function is not used, the server recognizes the volume related to LUN in each ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 port. This method is suitable for connecting the server and ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 directly. The following shows a basic concept when the same volume is LUN mapped to each port.
LUN#0 = Volume#0 : LUN#127 = Volume#127

ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90

LUN#0 : Server A LUN#127

Port
Volume#0 : Volume#127

LUN#0 : Server B LUN#127

Port

Server A and Server B recognize the Volume#0 as LUN#0

LUN#0 = Volume#0 : LUN#127 = Volume#127

The following shows a basic concept when different volumes are LUN mapped to each port.
LUN#0 = Volume#0 : LUN#127 = Volume#127

ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90
Server A recognizes Volume#0 as LUN#0 LUN#0 : Server A LUN#127 Volume#0

Port

: Volume#127

LUN#0 : Server B LUN#127 Server B recognizes Volume#128 as LUN#0 LUN#0 = Volume#128 : LUN#127 = Volume#255

Volume#128

Port

: : Volume#255

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

251

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 6 Global Settings > 6.5 Host I/F Management

6.5.1

Set Port Parameters


The [Set Port Parameters] function sets the connecting information for ports to connect to the server. There are three types of Host I/F; FC, iSCSI, and SAS. Procedures to set port parameters vary depending on the Host I/F types. When the Host Affinity function is enabled, use the [Setup Host] function to set the host response for each host. When the Host Affinity function is disabled, use the [Set Port Parameters] function to set the host response for each port.

For details, refer to "ETERNUS DX Disk storage systems Server Connection Guide" for each operating system.

Set FC Port Parameters


The [Set FC Port Parameters] function sets the connection information between the FC port of the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 and host, or connection information between the local and remote devices (FC port parameters). For ETERNUS DX90 There are two types of port modes; CA, used for connecting to the host, and RA, which is used for REC. Use the procedure described in "5.4.8 Modify Port Mode" (page 182) to change port the mode. For ETERNUS DX60/DX80 Only the CA port mode is available. The setting items vary depending on the port mode. The procedure to set FC port parameters is as follows:

Procedure

1 2

Click the [Set FC Port Parameters] under the [Host I/F Management] menu on the [Global Settings] tab.
The [Set FC Port Parameters] screen appears.

Specify the following items, and click the [Set] button.


- When the port mode is "CA" Port Select the target port. Port Mode Port mode for the target port is displayed. Connection Select the connection method for the target port from the "Fabric" or "FC-AL". When "FC-AL" is selected, it is necessary to assign a Loop ID to the port. Set Loop ID When the "Connection" is "FC-AL", select "Manual" or "Auto" to specify the Loop ID.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

252

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 6 Global Settings > 6.5 Host I/F Management

Loop ID When the "Set Loop ID" is "Auto", select "Ascending" or "Descending". When the "Set Loop ID" is "Manual", specify the Loop ID (last 2 digits of 0x00 to 0x7D). Transfer Rate (Gbit/s) Select the transfer speed of the target port from the following: - For 4Gbit/s models Auto Negotiation 1 2 4 - For 8Gbit/s models Auto Negotiation 2 4 8 Frame Size (bytes) Select the frame size of the target port according to the destination server or switch (2048, 1024, or 512). Host Affinity Select whether to "Enable" or "Disable" the Host Affinity function for the target port. Select "Enable" when restricting access to volumes for each server (when connecting via switches). Select "Disable" when restricting access to volumes for each port (when connecting directly to the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90). When connecting multiple servers and the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 directly and restricting access to volumes for each server, enable the Host Affinity setting. Host Response When the "Host Affinity" is "Disabled", select the host response to allocate to the target port. - 0:Default The initial pattern is displayed. Sense information is not converted. - Host Response (Number:Name) Identification number of the host response registered in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/ DX90 is displayed. When the host response name is registered, it is also displayed. Reset Scope Select the reset scope from "I_T_L" or "T_L". Reset scope is the range where the command reset request from the server is performed, when the port is connected to multiple servers. - I_T_L (I: Initiator, T: Target, L: LUN) Reset (cancel) the command request from the server that sent the command reset request. - T_L (T: Target, L: LUN) Reset (cancel) the command request from all servers that are connected to the port (regardless of whether the LUN is recognized). Release Reservation if Chip is Reset Select whether to "Enable" or "Disable" the function to release the volume's reserved status when the target port (chip) is in Reset status.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

253

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 6 Global Settings > 6.5 Host I/F Management

- When the port mode is "RA" Port Select the target port. Port Mode Port mode for the target port is displayed. Connection Select the connection method for the target port from the "Fabric" or "FC-AL". When "FC-AL" is selected, it is necessary to assign a Loop ID to the port. Set Loop ID When the "Connection" is "FC-AL", select "Manual" or "Auto" to specify the Loop ID. Loop ID When the "Set Loop ID" is "Manual", specify the Loop ID (last 2 digits of 0x00 to 0x7D). When the "Set Loop ID" is "Auto", select "Ascending" or "Descending". Transfer Rate (Gbit/s) Select the transfer speed of the target port from the following: - Auto Negotiation - 2 - 4 - 8

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

254

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 6 Global Settings > 6.5 Host I/F Management

Clicking the [Copy] button displays the screen for selecting the copy destination port. The port parameters are copied to the selected port.Note that copy can be performed between ports that have the same port mode. A confirmation screen appears.

Click the [OK] button.

The FC port parameters are set.

End of procedure

Set iSCSI Port Parameters


The [Set iSCSI Port Parameters] function sets the connection information between the iSCSI port of the ETERNUS DX60/DX80 and host (iSCSI port parameters). Each port must have a unique IP address. The same IP address cannot be set again in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80. An iSCSI name is a unique name in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80. The same iSCSI name cannot be specified for multiple iSCSI ports. However, the same iSCSI name has been specified for all ports by default (only the default value can be same). When these name must be recognized separately, change the iSCSI names. For multipath connection, iSCSI names must be changed.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

255

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 6 Global Settings > 6.5 Host I/F Management

The procedure to set iSCSI port parameters is as follows:

Procedure

1 2

Click the [Set iSCSI Port Parameters] under the [Host I/F Management] menu on the [Global Settings] tab.
The [Set iSCSI Port Parameters] screen appears.

Specify the following items, and click the [Set] button.


Port Select the target port. IP Address Specify the IP address (0 to 255) for the target port (required). Click the [Test Connection (ping)] button to display the [Send ping Command] screen. Specify the IP address of the connection destination device whose connection status is to be checked and number of execution, and click the [Send] button. Sending the "ping" command enables you to check whether the IP address is allocated correctly, and connection path to the destination device is normal. Subnet Mask Set the subnet mask (0 to 255) for the target port (required). Default Gateway Set the IP address (0 to 255) for the default gateway. iSNS Server Select wether to use the iSNS server in the target port. When "Enable" is selected, specify the IP address (0 to 255) for the iSNS server. Internet Storage Name Service (iSNS) is almost equivalent to Domain Name System (DNS) for the Internet. iSNS server is used to convert the iSCSI name to the IP address on the iSCSI network. iSCSI Name Set the iSCSI name for the target port. Between 1 and 233 alphanumeric characters and symbols (- (hyphen), : (colon), . (period)) can be used. Click the [Default] button to set the default iSCSI name. An iSCSI name is a unique name in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80. The same iSCSI name cannot be set to multiple iSCSI ports except the device iSCSI name. Alias Name Set the alias name for the target port. Between 1 and 31 alphanumeric characters and symbols (including blanks) can be used. While the iSCSI name is a formal nomenclature that specifies the target iSCSI port, an alias name is used as nickname.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

256

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 6 Global Settings > 6.5 Host I/F Management

Host Affinity Select whether to "Enable" or "Disable" the Host Affinity function for the target port. Select "Enable" when restricting access to volumes for each server (when connecting via switches). Select "Disable" when restricting access to volumes for each port (when connecting directly to the ETERNUS DX60/DX80). When connecting multiple servers and the ETERNUS DX60/DX80 directly and restricting access to volumes for each server, enable the Host Affinity setting. Host Response When the "Host Affinity" is "Disabled", select the host response to allocate to the target port. - 0:Default The initial pattern is displayed. Sense information is not converted. - Host Response (Number:Name) Identification number of the host response registered in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80 is displayed. When the host response name is registered, it is also displayed. Jumbo Frame Select wether to enable or disable the Jumbo Frame. Select "Enable" when using the Jumbo Frame to transfer data via the target port. When not using the Jumbo Frame, select "Disable". Enabling Jumbo Frame increases the amount of data to be transferred per Frame, making data transfer more efficient. Confirm that the connected device (*1) supports the Jumbo Frame before enabling the Jumbo Frame.
*1: When the ETERNUS DX60/DX80 and server are connected directly, this indicates that the connected device is a server side LAN card (NIC). When the ETERNUS DX60/DX80 and server are connected via a switch, this indicates that the connected device is a switch.

Transfer Rate Select the transfer speed of the target port from the following: - Auto Negotiation - 100Mbit/s - 1Gbit/s Note that since the ETERNUS DX60/DX80 iSCSI port does not support the Half-Duplex mode, the connected device (*1) must be set as follows.
Transfer speed of the ETERNUS DX60/DX80 Auto Negotiation 100Mbit/s 1Gbit/s *1: Transfer speed of the connected device (*1) Auto Negotiation 100Mbit/s (Full) 1Gbit/s

When the ETERNUS DX60/DX80 and server are connected directly, this indicates that the connected device is a server side LAN card (NIC). When the ETERNUS DX60/DX80 and server are connected via a switch, this indicates that the connected device is a switch.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

257

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 6 Global Settings > 6.5 Host I/F Management

Reset Scope Select the reset scope from "I_T_L" or "T_L". Reset scope is the range where the command reset request from the server is performed, when the port is connected to multiple servers. - I_T_L (I: Initiator, T: Target, L: LUN) Reset (cancel) the command request from the server that sent the command reset request. - T_L (T: Target, L: LUN) Reset (cancel) the command request from all servers that are connected to the port (regardless of whether the LUN is recognized). Release Reservation if Chip is Reset Select whether to "Enable" or "Disable" the function to release the volume's reserved status when the target port (chip) is in Reset status. CHAP Select "ON" when enabling CHAP authentication for the target port. To disable, select "OFF". For CHAP authentication, an encrypted password based on a random key that the ETERNUS DX60/DX80 receives from the host is sent, and connection possibility is judged on the server side. CHAP User Name When "ON" is selected for "CHAP", specify the user name that accesses the target port. Between 0 and 255 characters of alphanumeric characters and symbols (including blanks) can be used. This setting is required when CHAP authentication is used. Make sure to set the user name and password in pairs. Change CHAP Password When changing the CHAP password, select the checkbox. This checkbox can only be selected when "ON" is selected for "CHAP" and the password has already been set. Password Specify the password for the currently specifying "Chap User Name". New Password When "ON" is elected for "CHAP", specify the password that accesses the target port. Between 12 and 100 alphanumeric characters and symbols (including blanks) can be used. Make sure to set the user name and password in pairs. Confirm new Password Input the same character strings as the value entered in the "New Password" field for confirmation. Header Digest Select "OFF" when not adding Header Digest of the target port. When adding, select "CRC32C". Header Digest is a check code to be added to the header part of the iSCSI port detailed information. Specify "CRC32C" when the host requests to add the check code. "CRC32C" is algorithmic to create a check code. Data Digest Select "OFF" when not adding Data Digest of the target port. When adding, select "CRC32C". Data Digest is a check code to be added to the data area of the iSCSI port detailed information. Specify "CRC32C" when the host requests to add the check code. "CRC32C" is algorithmic to create a check code.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

258

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 6 Global Settings > 6.5 Host I/F Management

[Set iSCSI Port Parameters] screen (1/2)

[Set iSCSI Port Parameters] screen (2/2)

A confirmation screen appears.

Click the [OK] button.

The iSCSI port parameters are set.

End of procedure

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

259

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 6 Global Settings > 6.5 Host I/F Management

Set SAS Port Parameters


The [Set SAS Port Parameters] function sets the connection information between the SAS port of the ETERNUS DX60/DX80 and host (SAS port parameters). The procedure to set SAS port parameters is as follows:

Procedure

1 2

Click the [Set SAS Port Parameters] under the [Host I/F Management] menu on the [Global Settings] tab.
The [Set SAS Port Parameters] screen appears.

Specify the following items, and click the [Set] button.


Port Select the target port. Host Affinity Select whether to "Enable" or "Disable" the Host Affinity function for the target port. Select "Enable" when restricting access to volumes for each server. Select "Disable" when restricting access to volumes for each port. When connecting multiple servers and the ETERNUS DX60/DX80 directly and restricting access to volumes for each server, enable the Host Affinity setting. Host Response When the "Host Affinity" is "Disabled", select the host response to allocate to the target port. - 0:Default The initial pattern is displayed. Sense information is not converted. - Host Response (Number:Name) Identification number of the host response registered in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80 is displayed. When the host response name is registered, it is also displayed. Reset Scope Select the reset scope from "I_T_L" or "T_L". Reset scope is the range where the command reset request from the server is performed, when the port is connected to multiple servers. - I_T_L (I: Initiator, T: Target, L: LUN) Reset (cancel) the command request from the server that sent the command reset request. - T_L (T: Target, L: LUN) Reset (cancel) the command request from all servers that are connected to the port (regardless of whether the LUN is recognized). Release Reservation if Chip is Reset Select whether to "Enable" or "Disable" the function to release the volume's reserved status when the target port (chip) is in Reset status.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

260

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 6 Global Settings > 6.5 Host I/F Management

A confirmation screen appears.

Click the [OK] button.

The SAS port parameters are set.

End of procedure

6.5.2

Setup Host
The [Setup Host] function registers the HBA information to the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90. By registering HBA information, access to the volumes in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 is restricted, and connections from servers with unregistered hosts are not allowed (when the Host Affinity function is enabled). There are three types of Host I/F; FC, iSCSI, and SAS. The required setting varies depending on the Host I/F type. Host setting is not needed when the Host Affinity function is not used. When deleting the currently running host, the access from the target host must be stopped. To set a new host, it is not necessary to stop host access. When deleting host information, the settings for the affinity group and LUN mapping that are associated with the host must be disabled in advance. When using the Host Affinity functions, make sure to "Enable" the Host Affinity setting of the port using the [Set Port Parameters] function.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

261

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 6 Global Settings > 6.5 Host I/F Management

For details, refer to "ETERNUS DX Disk storage systems Server Connection Guide" for each operating system.

Setup FC Host
The [Setup FC Host] function registers the FC information of the HBAs installed in the FC host to be connected to the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90. Up to 16 FC hosts (HBAs) per port can be connected for ETERNUS DX60. For ETERNUS DX80/DX90, up to 32 FC hosts per port can be connected. The procedures to set the FC Host (register) are as follows:

Procedure

1 2

Click the [Setup FC Host] under the [Host I/F Management] menu on the [Global Settings] tab.
The [Setup FC Host] screen appears.

Click the [Add] button.

The "Add New FC Host" field is displayed.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

262

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 6 Global Settings > 6.5 Host I/F Management

When changing or deleting the FC host settings, select the target FC host in the "Registered FC Host List" field, and click the [Edit] or [Delete] button. When deleting all the registered FC hosts, click the [Delete All] button.

Specify the following items, and click the [Add] button.


FC Port The list of FC port existing in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 is displayed. When a fibre channel switch is connected to the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90, settings between the fibre channel switch and server (FC host) must be completed in advance.

When using an ETERNUS DX90, ports in which the port mode is "CA" are displayed in the FC Port field. Refer to "5.4.8 Modify Port Mode" (page 182) for details about port mode. WWN Select the WWN, or directly input a WWN (required). 16 capital letters and numerals can be used. Name Specify the FC host name (required). Between 1 and 16 alphanumeric characters, symbols (except ', (comma)' and '?', and '% used as the first letter'), and blanks can be used. Host Response Specify the host response for the target host (required).

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

263

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 6 Global Settings > 6.5 Host I/F Management

The target FC host is added in the "Registered FC Host List". To add multiple FC hosts, repeat the procedure for all the FC hosts to be added.

After registering all the FC hosts, click the [Done] button.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

264

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 6 Global Settings > 6.5 Host I/F Management

Click the [Set] button.

A confirmation screen appears.

Click the [OK] button.

The FC host is set (registered).

End of procedure

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

265

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 6 Global Settings > 6.5 Host I/F Management

Setup iSCSI Host


The [Setup iSCSI Host] function registers the iSCSI information of the Host Bus Adapters (HBAs) installed in the SAS host to be connected to the ETERNUS DX60/DX80. For iSCSI connection, configure the server as an iSCSI initiator (the host that sends commands), and the ETERNUS DX60/DX80 as an iSCSI target (the device that executes the commands). Authentication is performed using the iSCSI name in each session between an initiator and target. CHAP Authentication, which matches the user name and password, can be performed in this phase. Up to 16 iSCSI hosts (HBAs) per port can be connected for ETERNUS DX60. For ETERNUS DX80, up to 32 iSCSI hosts per port can be connected. The procedures to set the iSCSI Host (register) are as follows:

Procedure

1 2

Click the [Setup iSCSI Host] under the [Host I/F Management] menu on the [Global Settings] tab.
The [Setup iSCSI Host] screen appears.

Click the [Add] button.

When the IP address of the iSCSI host is not specified (0.0.0.0 is specified), "*" is displayed in the "IP Address" field of the "Registered iSCSI Host List". The "Add New iSCSI Host" field is displayed.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

266

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 6 Global Settings > 6.5 Host I/F Management

When changing or deleting the iSCSI host settings, select the target iSCSI host in the "Registered iSCSI Host List" field, and click the [Edit] or [Delete] button. When deleting all the registered iSCSI hosts, click the [Delete All] button.

Specify the following items, and click the [Add] button.


iSCSI Port The list of iSCSI port existing in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80 is displayed. iSCSI Name Select the iSCSI Name, or directly input the iSCSI Name (required). Between 4 and 223 alphanumeric characters and symbols can be used. The iSCSI Name cannot be obtained automatically in the following conditions: The [Discover] button is inactivated When "Disable" is selected for the "iSNS server" in the "Set iSCSI Port Parameters" IP Address Specify the IP address of the iSCSI host. When the IP address is not used for registering the host, this item is not required. Name Specify the iSCSI Host Name (required). Between 1 and 16 alphanumeric characters, symbols (except ', (comma)' and '?', and '% used as the first letter'), and blanks can be used. Host Response Specify the host response for the target host (required). Alias Name Specify the alias name for the iSCSI host. Up to 31 alphanumeric characters and symbols can be used. CHAP User Name Specify the user name to access the target host. Between 0 and 255 alphanumeric characters and symbols can be used. This setting is not needed when CHAP authentication is not used.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

267

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 6 Global Settings > 6.5 Host I/F Management

CHAP Password Specify the password to access the target host. Between 12 and 100 alphanumeric characters and symbols can be used. Make sure to set the user name and password in pairs.

Confirm CHAP Password Input the same character strings as the value entered in the "CHAP Password" field for confirmation.

The target iSCSI host is added in the "Registered iSCSI Host List". To add multiple iSCSI hosts, repeat the procedure for all the iSCSI hosts to be added.

After registering all the iSCSI hosts, click the [Done] button.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

268

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 6 Global Settings > 6.5 Host I/F Management

Click the [Set] button.

A confirmation screen appears.

Click the [OK] button.

The iSCSI host is set (registered).

End of procedure

Setup SAS Host


The [Setup SAS Host] function registers the SAS information of the Host Bus Adapters (HBAs) installed in the SAS host to be connected to the ETERNUS DX60/DX80. Up to one SAS host (HBAs) per port can be connected.

The procedures to set the SAS Host (register) are as follows:

Procedure

Click the [Setup SAS Host] under the [Host I/F Management] menu on the [Global Settings] tab.
The [Setup SAS Host] screen appears.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

269

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 6 Global Settings > 6.5 Host I/F Management

Click the [Add] button.

The "Add New SAS Host" field is displayed. When changing or deleting the SAS host settings, select the target SAS host in the "Registered SAS Host List" field, and click the [Edit] or [Delete] button. When deleting all the registered SAS hosts, click the [Delete All] button.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

270

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 6 Global Settings > 6.5 Host I/F Management

Specify the following items, and click the [Add] button.


SAS Port The list of SAS port existing in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80 is displayed. SAS Address Select the SAS address, or directly input a SAS address (required). 16 capital letters and numerals can be used. Name Specify the SAS Host Name (required). Between 1 and 16 alphanumeric characters, symbols (except ', (comma)' and '?', and '% used as the first letter'), and blanks can be used. Host Response Specify the host response for the target host (required).

The target SAS host is added in the "Registered SAS Host List". To add multiple SAS hosts, repeat the procedure for all the SAS hosts to be added.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

271

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 6 Global Settings > 6.5 Host I/F Management

After registering all the SAS hosts, click the [Done] button.

Click the [Set] button.

A confirmation screen appears.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

272

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 6 Global Settings > 6.5 Host I/F Management

Click the [OK] button.

The SAS host is set (registered).

End of procedure

6.5.3

Setup Host Response


The [Setup Host Response] function adds, changes, and/or deletes the Host Response settings, which is the information added to the response to the server. By specifying the correct host response, it prevents the following conditions: Server cannot recognize the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 when connecting Server cannot take appropriate measures against an ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 error For more details about setting the Host Response for each OS type, refer to "ETERNUS DX Disk storage systems Server Connection Guide". If the Host Response is not changed, the default pattern provided by the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 is assigned. If a host response item is in use by a port or host, release it from the port or host (by associating them with the default host response) before editing or deleting the host response. Up to 256 Host Responses can be set. The target to be assigned to the Host Response varies depending on whether the Host Affinity function is used or not used. When the Host Affinity function is used. Set the Host Response per server HBA (Refer to "6.5.2 Setup Host" (page 261)). When the Host Affinity function is not used. Set the Host Response per port (Refer to "6.5.1 Set Port Parameters" (page 252)). The procedure to add the host response is as follows:

Procedure

Click the [Setup Host Response] under the [Host I/F Management] menu on the [Global Settings] tab.
The [Setup Host Response] screen appears.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

273

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 6 Global Settings > 6.5 Host I/F Management

Click the [Add] button.

The "Edit Host Response" field is displayed. When changing or deleting the Host Response, select the target Host Response from the tree in the left of screen or target Host Response listed in the "Host Response List" field, and click the [Edit] or [Delete] button. When deleting all the registered Host Responses, click the [Delete All] button.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

274

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 6 Global Settings > 6.5 Host I/F Management

Specify the following items, and click the [OK] button.


By clicking the button in the "Preset" field, the default host response settings for each host environment can be specified. [Windows - msdsm] button Changes the setting to the value recommended for connecting to Windows hosts where Microsoft Device Specific Module (DSM) has been installed. [Linux - devicemapper] button Changes the setting to the value recommended for connecting to Linux hosts where device-mapper-multipath has been installed. [Solaris - MPxIO] button Changes the setting to the value recommended for connecting to Solaris hosts where MPxIO has been installed. [VMware - ESX4] button Changes the setting to the value recommended for connecting to VMware hosts where VMware vSphere 4 (ESX 4.0) has been installed. [VMware - ESX3.5] button Changes the setting to the value recommended for connecting to VMware hosts where VMware Infrastructure 3 (ESX 3.5 or ESXi 3.5) has been installed. [Egenera - PAN manager] button Changes the setting to the value recommended for connecting to Egenera hosts where PAN manager has been installed. Response No. Host response identification number is displayed. Response Name Specify the host response name. Between 1 and 16 alphanumeric characters, symbols (except ', (comma)' and '?', and '% used as the first letter'), and blanks can be used. Byte-0 of Inquiry Response Set the value for Byte-0 of the "Inquiry" command from "No Conversion (Default)" or "Custom". After the link between the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 and the host is established, the host sends an "Inquiry" command to check the status of the volumes for a certain period of time. Specify the Byte-0 of the Inquiry data to respond this "Inquiry" command. Byte-0 in the Inquiry data indicates the volume status. - No Conversion (Default) Responds with the value specified in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90. - Custom When the Byte-0 is "0x20 (configuration is available, unformatted)", converts the Byte-0 value to "0x7f (configuration is not available)" and responds.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

275

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 6 Global Settings > 6.5 Host I/F Management

Inquiry VPD ID Type Set the Vital Product Data (VPD) information type to respond to the host. VPD information includes the device information (Vender ID, Product ID for each model, volume number, etc.) for the volume. Type1 and Type3 indicate the data format. - Type1 + Type3 (Default) - Type1 - Type3 Inquiry Standard Data Version Specify the Standard Data Version (version number of the SCSI standard) of the "Inquiry" command. - Version 5 (Default) - Version 4 - Version 3 Command Timeout Interval Select the setting method for the command timeout interval from the following items. - Default (25sec.) - Customize When "Customize" is selected, input a value between 10 and 255 seconds (numeric). Load Balance Response This field sets the response status when an overload-derived timeout is detected. The server retry reaction is determined by this setting. While the default response should be compatible with all systems, the setting may be changed as required by any problems that occur. Contact your maintenance engineer to change the setting. - [Disable] Unit Attention (Default) - [Disable] Busy - [Disable] Queue Full Reservation Conflict Response for Test Unit Ready Select whether to notify or not notify the Reservation Conflict to the "Test Unit Ready" command when volumes from the other host are reserved. - Normal (Default) - Conflict Change Volume Mapping Select whether to "No Report (Default)" or "Report" to the host when a volume that can be accessed from the host is added or deleted. Volume Capacity Expansion Select whether to "No Report (Default)" or "Report" to the host when the capacity of a volume is changed. Vendor Unique Sense Code Select whether to "No Report (Default)" or "Report" the vendor unique sense code to the host. Vendor Unique Sense indicates the unique sense code for each vendor that is not coincident with host I/O.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

276

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 6 Global Settings > 6.5 Host I/F Management

Host Specific Mode Set the operation for specific host. - Normal (Default) - AIX Mode Select this to prevent the command initialization and performance degradation. - HP-UX Mode Select this to recognize volumes with more than 8LU(s). Asymmetric / Symmetric Logical Unit Access Select the access type from the host to Logical Unit. - ACTIVE-ACTIVE / PREFERRED_PATH (Default) - ACTIVE / ACTIVE Sense Data Conversion Select the sense code conversion pattern. - No Conversion (Default) - Linux Recommended (When not using GRMPD) Select this pattern to prevent malfunction of Linux hosts for which GR Multipath Driver has not been installed. - Windows Recommended (When not using GR/ETERNUS MPD or Device Driver) Select this pattern to prevent malfunction of Windows hosts for which GR/ ETERNUS Multipath Driver, or Device Driver have not been installed. - Customize This setting is displayed only when the special sense conversion pattern is specified. Settings can be checked in the "SK/ASC/ASCQ". SK/ASC/ASCQ This field is displayed when "Customize" is selected for the "Sense Data Conversion". - SK: Sense Key - ASC: Additional Sense Code - ASCQ: Additional Sense Code Qualifier - [Setup Host Response] screen (1/5)

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

277

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 6 Global Settings > 6.5 Host I/F Management

- [Setup Host Response] screen (2/5)

- [Setup Host Response] screen (3/5)

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

278

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 6 Global Settings > 6.5 Host I/F Management

- [Setup Host Response] screen (4/5)

- [Setup Host Response] screen (5/5)

Click the [Set] button.


A confirmation screen appears.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

279

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 6 Global Settings > 6.5 Host I/F Management

Click the [OK] button.

The new host response is added.

End of procedure

6.5.4

Modify Reset Group


The [Modify Reset Group] sets the reset group to switch the path for some servers. A reset group is a setting that groups multiple ports that will be reset. If a host is unable to access the volumes in a port, this function releases the volumes reserved by the inaccessible port to the ports in the specified reset group, without affecting other ports. The reset group setting sets this range for each port. When a 2-port configuration server (including duplication) using the same volume cannot be accessed, it is possible to access the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 from the opposite port (standby side). The port for the paths that access the same volume must be grouped in the same reset group. Even if the server is different, ports accessing the same volume must be set in the same reset group. When a port is shared by multiple servers using the "5.3.10 Configure LUN Mapping" (page 130) function, only volumes that are included in the LUN mapping assigned to the target server in the Host Affinity setting are subject to release. One port cannot be registered in multiple reset groups. When using the ETERNUS DX90, ports whose port mode is "RA" cannot be selected as a grouping target port. For more details on which server is necessary to set/change the reset group, refer to "ETERNUS DX Disk storage systems Server Connection Guide" for each OS type.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

280

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 6 Global Settings > 6.5 Host I/F Management

The procedure to set the reset group is as follows:

Procedure

Click the [Modify Reset Group] under the [Host I/F Management] menu on the [Global Settings] tab.
The [Modify Reset Group] screen appears.

Select the port that belongs to the same reset group, and click the [Set] button.

A confirmation screen appears.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

281

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 6 Global Settings > 6.5 Host I/F Management

Click the [OK] button.

The reset group is set.

End of procedure

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

282

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 7

Maintenance

This chapter describes maintenance related operations.

7.1

Hot Expansion
This function can expand the components without stopping device operation. The device needs expansion of components to the original configuration in order to enhance performance, increase the number of available volumes, or increase the number of connected hosts. Disks and drive enclosures can be expanded in hot mode. Disks can be expanded in hot mode by physical installation in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90. This operation does not require GUI operation.

The maximum number of disks and drive enclosures


The following explains the maximum number of disks and drive enclosures that can be installed in each model.
Model ETERNUS DX60 ETERNUS DX80/DX90 *1: 24 120 (*1) Disk 1 9 Drive enclosure

Up to nine SSDs can be installed in the ETERNUS DX80/DX90.

The expanded disks can be used after registering in the RAID group or as hot spare disks. When the maximum number of parts set for each model has already been installed, the parts cannot be expanded. When adding two or more disks, install disks one by one after an interval (of approximately 30 seconds). Confirm that the status LED of the expanded disk glows green, then add the next disks. Be sure to use authorized expansion parts. If parts other than the expansion parts are used, operation is not guaranteed. When encryption is in progress, disk expansion is not available. Perform the disk expansion operation after completing the encryption process. Only one drive enclosure can be added at once. To add multiple drive enclosures, repeat the procedure for all the drive enclosures to be added.

Refer to "4.1 Storage System Status" (page 44) for component status display.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

283

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 7 Maintenance > 7.1 Hot Expansion

7.1.1

Add Drive Enclosure


The [Add Drive Enclosure] function can expand the drive enclosure while the ETERNUS DX60/ DX80/DX90 is operating. If expansion fails due to an error or problem, the expansion can be restarted from the interrupted point by starting this function again and recovering the failed expansion parts. However, when disk operation is not normal, maintenance is required. The procedure to add a drive enclosure in hot mode is as follows:

Procedure

1 2

Click the [Add Drive Enclosure] under the [Hardware Maintenance] menu on the [Maintenance] tab.
The [Add Drive Enclosure] screen appears.

Click the [Next >] button.

The procedure to add DE is displayed.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

284

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 7 Maintenance > 7.1 Hot Expansion

Install the drive enclosure in the rack according to the displayed procedure, and click the [Next >] button.

The expanded components identification process starts.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

285

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 7 Maintenance > 7.1 Hot Expansion

Confirm the "Auto Power" switch for the target drive enclosure is "OFF", and click the [Next >] button.

The [Add Drive Enclosure] procedure is completed.

Click the [OK] button.

End of procedure

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

286

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 8

Display and Download Information (Diagnosis)

This chapter describes how to display and download ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 related information.

8.1

Display Event Log


The [Display Event Log] function records and displays the event history of the ETERNUS DX60/ DX80/DX90 as an event log. The event log is one of the internal logs stored in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90. The event log contains a history of events that are related to set the information changes, such as module failures and volume creation. Up to 800 (400 per a CM) event logs can be displayed. Once the recorded event log is no longer necessary, it can also be deleted. Even after deleting internal logs using the "8.2 Export/Delete Log" (page 289) function, the event log remains in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90. The procedure to display the event log is as follows:

Procedure

Click the [Display Event Log] menu on the [Diagnosis] tab.


The [Display Event Log] screen appears.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

287

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 8 Display and Download Information (Diagnosis) > 8.1 Display Event Log

Click the [Delete] button to delete the event log. Click the [Refresh] button to obtain the latest event log.

End of procedure

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

288

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 8 Display and Download Information (Diagnosis) > 8.2 Export/Delete Log

8.2

Export/Delete Log
The [Export/Delete Log] function exports and saves the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 maintenance information (log) according to user-specified time. An exported log can be stored on a floppy disk or hard disk, or sent by mail. Also users can select a log segment size in accordance with save destination.

The maintenance information to be exported


Logs include an internal log and setup information. Internal log Detected errors, warnings, and traces. Setup information The setup information exported from the device. The internal log and setup information cannot be exported separately. The procedure to export log information is as follows:

Procedure

1 2

Click the [Export/Delete Log] menu on the [Diagnosis] tab.


The [Export/Delete Log] screen appears.

Set the following items and click the [Export] button.


Specify Time Range Select whether to specify the time range with "Yes" or "No", or select the "Last 24 hours" radio button. Start Time When a time range is to be specified, specify the date and time to start exporting logs. End Time When a time range is to be specified, specify the date and time to end exporting logs. Include Expander log Select whether to export the Expander log with the "Yes" or "No" radio button. Log File Size Select the log segment size when saving the exported log. - Non-segmentation - 4.27MB - 1.44MB (Floppy Disk) - 640KB (E-Mail)

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

289

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 8 Display and Download Information (Diagnosis) > 8.2 Export/Delete Log

Delete of Customer Information Select whether to delete the customer information with the "Yes" or "No" radio button. In the following conditions, an error screen appears. When the input date and/or time are not valid (For example: February 31st) When the end time is earlier than the start time

A confirmation screen appears.

Click the [OK] button.

The log is exported. After exporting log completes, a dialog box to download the log file appears.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

290

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 8 Display and Download Information (Diagnosis) > 8.2 Export/Delete Log

Click the [Download] button to save the exported log.

After exporting the log completes, save the log file immediately.

Save the log file.


Take care so that the segments are not overwritten. When exporting segmented log files, make sure to export the segment within five minutes. If five minutes passes before exporting the next segment, exporting the log fails. After saving one segment is finished, save the next segment immediately. If the log file is segmented, download and save the next segment (save all the segmented files). When "Non-segmentation" is selected in the "Log File Size" field, the [Download] button described in Step 4 becomes inactive after the save process of the log file completes.

Click the [Finish] button.


Exporting log is completed. After exporting the log completes, make sure to perform "8.3 Export Panic Dump" (page 292).

End of procedure

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

291

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 8 Display and Download Information (Diagnosis) > 8.3 Export Panic Dump

8.3

Export Panic Dump


"Panic Dump" is the action of outputting (dump) memory information when an error (panic) occurs, and also the name of the output information itself. This function exports and saves the memory information of the controller that is stored in the panic dump data, in a segment size specified by the user. An exported panic dump can be stored on a floppy disk or hard disk, or sent by mail. Panic dump data is used to analyze the cause of a firmware abnormality or hardware error. This function cannot be used when there is no panic dump to be exported in the device. Two panic dumps are stored per CM, and four per device. When all four panic dumps in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 are stored within the last 14 days, a new panic dump cannot be saved. The procedure to export panic dump is as follows:

Procedure

Click the [Export Panic Dump] menu on the [Diagnosis] tab.


The [Export Panic Dump] screen appears.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

292

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 8 Display and Download Information (Diagnosis) > 8.3 Export Panic Dump

Set the following items, and click the [Export] button.


Panic Dumps Select panic dump to be exported from the list displayed in the screen. Option - Dump File Segment Size Select the dump file segment size to save the obtained panic dump. Non-segmentation 4.27MB 1.44MB (Floppy Disk) 640KB (E-Mail)

A confirmation screen appears.

Click the [OK] button.

The selected panic dump is exported. After the panic dump export is finished, a screen to execute saving the panic dump is displayed.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

293

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 8 Display and Download Information (Diagnosis) > 8.3 Export Panic Dump

Click the [Download] button to save the exported panic dump.

When exporting a panic dump file is finished, save the panic dump file.

Save the panic dump.


When the panic dump file is segmented, download and save the next segment (save all the segmented files). Take care so that the segments are not overwritten. When exporting segmented panic dump files, make sure to export the segment within five minutes. If five minutes passes before exporting the next segment, exporting the panic dump fails. After saving one segment is finished, save the next segment immediately.

When "Non-segmentation" is selected in the "Dump File Segment Size" field, the [Download] button described in Step 4 becomes inactive after the save process of the panic dump file completes.

End of procedure

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

294

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 8 Display and Download Information (Diagnosis) > 8.4 Start/Stop Performance Monitoring

8.4

Start/Stop Performance Monitoring


GUI contains a function that acquires performance information and displays the result. The [Start/Stop Performance Monitoring] function is used to start/stop acquiring the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 performance information. Acquired information can be checked using the "8.5 Display Performance Information" (page 298) function. When the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 is rebooted, monitoring performance process is stopped. When other monitoring software, such as ETERNUS SF Storage Cruiser, is controlling performance information, performance information cannot be acquired using the Web GUI. The procedure to start/stop acquiring performance information is as follows:

Start Performance Monitoring

Procedure

1 2

Click the [Start/Stop Performance Monitoring] menu on the [Diagnosis] tab.


The [Start/Stop Performance Monitoring] screen appears.

Specify the following item, and click the [Start] button.


Monitoring State Current status of performance information acquisition operation is displayed. Interval (sec.) Input the interval to acquire the performance information between 30 and 300 (sec.) in units of 30 seconds.

A confirmation screen appears.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

295

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 8 Display and Download Information (Diagnosis) > 8.4 Start/Stop Performance Monitoring

Click the [OK] button.

Acquisition of performance information is started.

End of procedure

Stop Performance Monitoring

Procedure

1 2

Click the [Start/Stop Performance Monitoring] menu on the [Diagnosis] tab.


The [Start/Stop Performance Monitoring] screen appears.

Click the [Stop] button.

A confirmation screen appears.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

296

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 8 Display and Download Information (Diagnosis) > 8.4 Start/Stop Performance Monitoring

Click the [OK] button.

Acquisition of performance information is stopped.

End of procedure

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

297

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 8 Display and Download Information (Diagnosis) > 8.5 Display Performance Information

8.5

Display Performance Information


The [Display Performance Information] function displays performance information related to the Host I/O, Advanced Copy, disks, CM, and host port, which is obtained by the Master CM in advance. By collecting the CM (CPU) usage rate in the device and busy ratio of the disk, operating conditions and work load in the device can be checked. The performance information acquisition operation must be started by using the "8.4 Start/Stop Performance Monitoring" (page 295) function or other monitoring software (such as ETERNUS SF Storage Cruiser) in advance. The procedure to display the performance information is as follows:

Procedure

Click the [Display Performance Information] menu on the [Diagnosis] tab.


The [Display Performance Information] menu appears. Click the tree view on the left of the screen to display information for each component.

Click the [Save] button to save the performance information. Click the [Refresh] button to obtain the latest information.

End of procedure

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

298

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 8 Display and Download Information (Diagnosis) > 8.6 Display Error Information

8.6

Display Error Information


The [Display Error Information] function displays the total number of errors for disks and ports. An increasing number of error occurrences in the information is used to indicate early replacement of warning status components, and for analysis information when performance degradation occurs. Also, deleting unnecessary disk error information can be deleted. The procedure to display error information is as follows:

Procedure

Click the [Display Error Information] menu on the [Diagnosis] tab.


The [Display Error Information] screen appears. Click the link on the left of the screen, and display the [Disk Error Statistics] screen and [Port Error Statistics] screen. - Disk Error Statistics

The [Clear Statistics] targeting checkboxes are only provided for disks with error information. To clear the error information for each disk, select the checkbox for the target disk and click the [Clear Statistics] button. To clear the error information for all the disks, click the [Clear All Statistics] button. Click the [Refresh] button to obtain the latest information.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

299

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Chapter 8 Display and Download Information (Diagnosis) > 8.6 Display Error Information

- Port Error Statistics

End of procedure

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

300

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Appendix A Install Site Certificate

This chapter describes how to install the web-site certificate. This chapter provides an example of when using Internet Explorer and Firefox.

A.1

For Internet Explorer


This section describes the procedure to install security certificate. The procedure to install security certificate for Internet Explorer 7 is as follows: When using Internet Explorer 8, register the URL of the ETERNUS DX60/ DX80/DX90 in "Trusted Sites" before installing the security certificate. Use the Internet Option and specify the URL to be used for connecting to the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 (https://IP address of the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90) to the "Trusted Sites".

Procedure

Enter the URL to the address bar in the web browser.


Specify "https://IP address of the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90" (Default IP address is "192.168.1.1"). A confirmation screen for security certificate appears.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

301

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Appendix A Install Site Certificate > A.1 For Internet Explorer

Click the "Continue to this website (not recommended)" link.

The logon screen for GUI is displayed.

Click the "Certificate Error".

A warning message appears.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

302

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Appendix A Install Site Certificate > A.1 For Internet Explorer

Click the "View Certificates" link.

The site certificate information appears.

Click the [Install Certificate] button.

The "Certificate Import Wizard" appears.

Click the [Next >] button.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

303

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Appendix A Install Site Certificate > A.1 For Internet Explorer

Select "Place all certificates in the following store".

The "Select Certificate Store" screen appears. If "Automatically select the certificate store based on the type of certificate" is selected in the "Certificate Import Wizard", an error may occur in the security certificate according to the customer environment.

Select the "Trusted Root Certification Authorities", and click the [OK] button.

Click the [Finish] button.

The "Security Warning" dialog box appears.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

304

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Appendix A Install Site Certificate > A.1 For Internet Explorer

10 Click the [Yes] button.

After clicking the [No] button, the operation may not be continuable. If this occurs, restart the web browser. The completion screen appears.

11 Click the [OK] button.

The security certificate is installed. Restart the web browser.

End of procedure

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

305

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Appendix A Install Site Certificate > A.2 For Firefox

A.2

For Firefox
This section provides the procedure to install the security certificate. The example when installing security certificate for Firefox 3.0.8 is as follows:

Procedure

Enter the URL to the address bar in the web browser.


Specify "https://IP address of the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90" (Default IP address is "192.168.1.1"). A confirmation screen for security certificate appears.

Click the "Or you can add an exception..." link.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

306

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Appendix A Install Site Certificate > A.2 For Firefox

Click the [Add Exception...] button.

The [Add Exception] screen appears.

Click the [Get Certificate] button.

The status of certificate is displayed.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

307

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Appendix A Install Site Certificate > A.2 For Firefox

Click the [Confirm Security Exception] button.

The security certificate is installed. Restart the web browser.

End of procedure

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

308

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Appendix B Factory Default List

The following shows the factory default settings.


Item Set Eco-mode Schedule Modify Copy Parameters Contents Eco-mode General Setting Eco-mode Setting value Disable Setting range

Enable Disable
1 97 2 98 3 99

Policy Level 1 (Informational) of Snap Data Pool Policy Level 2 (Warning) of Snap Data Pool Policy Level 3 (Error) of Snap Data Pool

Threshold (%) Threshold (%) Threshold (%)

50 70 99 Automatic Priority

Modify EC/ OPC Priority

EC/OPC Priority

Automatic
Priority

High Priority Low Priority


Modify Copy Table Size Advanced Copy feature enabled Copy Table Size Resolution On x1

On Off
x1 x2 x4 x8 x16

Table Size (MB)

ETERNUS DX60 ETERNUS DX80/DX90

0 0 Direct 0 0 CA

0 64 (MB) 0 128 (MB)

Create Copy Path

Select Copy Path

Set Line

Connection Type Link Speed (Mbit/s) Compression Ratio (%)

Remote Direct
1 65535 (Mbit/s) 0 99 (%)

Modify Port Mode

Port Mode

CA RA

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

309

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Appendix B Factory Default List >

Item Setup User Account User Role

Contents Advanced User Name

Setting value f.ce

Setting range 4 16 alphanumeric characters and symbols ('!', '-', '_', '.') 4 16 alphanumeric characters and symbols ('!', '-', '_', '.') 4 16 alphanumeric characters and symbols ('!', '-', '_', '.') 4 16 alphanumeric characters and symbols ('!', '-', '_', '.')

Password

Check code + Serial No. (default)

Standard

User Name

root

Password

root

Setup Network Environment

Interface

Speed and Duplex

MNT

Auto Negotiation

Auto
Negotiation


RMT Auto Negotiation

1Gbit/s 100Mbit/s Half 100Mbit/s Full 10Mbit/s Half 10Mbit/s Full Negotiation

Auto
1Gbit/s 100Mbit/s Half 100Mbit/s Full 10Mbit/s Half 10Mbit/s Full

Master CM IP Address Slave CM IP Address Subnet Mask Default Gateway Primary DNS Secondary DNS

MNT RMT MNT RMT MNT RMT MNT RMT MNT RMT MNT RMT

192.168.1.1 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 255.255.255.0 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0

0 255 0 255 0 255 0 255 0 255 0 255 0 255 0 255 0 255 0 255 0 255 0 255

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

310

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Appendix B Factory Default List >

Item Setup Network Environment Interface

Contents http MNT RMT https MNT RMT telnet MNT RMT SSH MNT RMT Maintenance MNT RMT Maintenance -Secure MNT RMT ICMP MNT RMT Allowed IP List IP Address Subnet Mask MNT RMT MNT RMT

Setting value Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Disable Disable Enable Enable 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 Disable MNT Send SNMP Trap

Setting range

Enable Disable Enable Disable Enable Disable Enable Disable Enable Disable Enable Disable Enable Disable Enable Disable Enable Disable Enable Disable Enable Disable Enable Disable Enable Disable Enable Disable
0 255 0 255 0 255 0 255

Setup SNMP Agent (Basic Interface)

Set Basic Interface

SNMP Function LAN Port used for SNMP Authentication Failure

Enable Disable MNT RMT Send SNMP


Trap

Do not send
SNMP Trap

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

311

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Appendix B Factory Default List >

Item Setup SNMP Agent (Basic Interface) Setup E-Mail Notification Set Basic Interface

Contents Abnormal parts during maintenance

Setting value Notification

Setting range

Notification Not
notification

Notification E-Mail

Notification E-Mail Destination E-Mail Address

Disable MNT 25 None Automatic

Enable Disable
Up to five addresses

Mail Server Settings

LAN Port used for SMTP Connection Sender E-Mail Address SMTP Server SMTP Port No. SMTP requires authentication User Name Password Authentication Method

MNT RMT

1 65535

None AUTH SMTP

Automatic CRAM-MD5 PLAIN LOGIN

Retry Setting Setup Remote Support Communication Environment Information

Maximum Retries Retry Interval (sec.) Connection Connection Type

0 1 Internet Connection

0 or 1 0 5 (sec.)

Internet
Connection

Internet
Connection (Mail only)

P-P
Connection

P-P
Connection (Mail only)

P-P
Connection (VPN Connection)

P-P
Connection (VPN Connection Mail only) LAN Port used for Remote Support MNT

MNT RMT

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

312

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Appendix B Factory Default List >

Item Setup Remote Support Communication Environment Information

Contents Service Scheduled Connection Time Scheduled Connection Period

Setting value Undefined (10:00 - 15:00)


(*1)

Setting range 00:00 23:59

Every Day

Every Day Every Day


(except Sunday)

Every Day
(except Saturday and Sunday)

Once
per Week Specify the Day of the Week Sunday

Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday

Proxy Server

Proxy Server

Up to 63 alphanumeric characters and symbols 0 65535 (numerals) Up to 63 alphanumeric characters and symbols 0 65535 (numerals) Up to 63 alphanumeric characters and symbols

Port No. Storage System E-Mail Configuration SMTP Server

Port No. Sender Mail Address

25

SMTP Authentication Information

Authentication Type

No SMTP Authentication

No SMTP
Authentication

POP Before
SMTP Authentication

AUTH SMTP
Authentication Authentication Method Automatic

Automatic CRAM-MD5 PLAIN LOGIN

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

313

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Appendix B Factory Default List >

Item Setup Remote Support SMTP Authentication Information

Contents POP Server

Setting value

Setting range Up to 63 alphanumeric characters and symbols 0 65535 (numerals)

Port No. REMCS Center REMCS Center

0 REMCS Center

Fujitsu
America

Australia Brazil Hong-Kong China Indonesia Korea Malaysia Philippine Singapore Taiwan Thailand Vietnam Individual support in Hawaii

OSC Direct Input


Setting HTTP Server Up to 63 alphanumeric characters and symbols 0 65535 (numerals) Up to 63 alphanumeric characters and symbols

Port No. Receiver Mail Address

Detailed Configuration Information

Mail Message Fragmentation Setting

Enable Message Fragmentation

Enable
Message Fragmentation

Disable
Message Fragmentation 64 Specify Storage System Name for HELO/EHLO Announcement when Sending Mail Do not specify 64 6400 (KB)

Specify Do not specify


Up to 32 alphanumeric characters and symbols

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

314

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Appendix B Factory Default List >

Item Setup Remote Support Time Information

Contents Change following Timing Parameter items SMTP Response Timeout (sec.) SMTP Retry Count SMTP Retry Interval (sec.) HTTP Timeout (sec.) HTTP Retry Count HTTP Retry Interval (sec.) Queue Time before Sending Mails (msec.) (only when POP Before SMTP authentication is enabled)

Setting value Not selected 60 5 30 30 5 5 1000

Setting range

Selected Not selected


1 3600 (numerals) 1 60 1 3600 (numerals) 1 3600 (numerals) 1 60 1 3600 (numerals) 1 3600 (numerals)

Setup Log Sending Parameters

Configure Automatic Log Transmission

Send Log based on Events Send Log Periodically

Send Log when Errors Occur Enable Periodical Transmission of Log. Time

Send

Send Not selected Selected Not selected


00:00 23:59

Selected

Undefined (10:00 - 15:00)


(*1)

Period

Once per Week Undefined (any day from Monday to Friday) (*1) Selected

Every Day Once


per Week Select from Monday to Fri day.

Day of the Week

Setup Event Notification

Setting based on Severity

All Error Events

E-Mail SNMP Trap Host Sense


Key Code Qualifier

REMCS
All Warning Events Selected

E-Mail SNMP Trap Host Sense


Key Code Qualifier

All Informational Events

Not selected

E-Mail SNMP Trap

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

315

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Appendix B Factory Default List >

Item Setup Event Notification Error Severity Level

Contents Disk was broken

Setting value Selected

Setting range

E-Mail SNMP Trap Host Sense


Key Code Qualifier

Broken Disk (when HS<0)

Not selected

E-Mail SNMP Trap Host Sense


Key Code Qualifier

Module was broken

Selected

E-Mail SNMP Trap Host Sense


Key Code Qualifier

Remote Path Error

Selected

E-Mail SNMP Trap Host Sense


Key Code Qualifier

REMCS
REC Buffer Halt (Path Error) Selected

E-Mail SNMP Trap REMCS E-Mail SNMP Trap REMCS E-Mail SNMP Trap REMCS

REC Buffer Halt (Overload)

Selected

REC Buffer Halt (Error)

Selected

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

316

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Appendix B Factory Default List >

Item Setup Event Notification Warning Level

Contents Disk reported a Warning

Setting value Selected

Setting range

E-Mail SNMP Trap Host Sense


Key Code Qualifier

Warning Disk (when HS<0)

Not selected

E-Mail SNMP Trap Host Sense


Key Code Qualifier

Module reported a Warning

Selected

E-Mail SNMP Trap Host Sense


Key Code Qualifier

RAID Degradation Event

Selected

E-Mail SNMP Trap Host Sense


Key Code Qualifier

RAID Degradation Event (when HS<0)

Not selected

E-Mail SNMP Trap Host Sense


Key Code Qualifier

RAID Recovery Event

Selected

Host Sense
Key Code Qualifier

Recovery from Error Blink Panel Fault LED

Not selected Enable

SNMP Trap Enable Disable

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

317

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Appendix B Factory Default List >

Item Setup Event Notification Informational Level

Contents Power on Completed Controller Firmware updated Created RAID Group Deleted RAID Group RAID Group Name Changed Assigned Hot Spare Released Hot Spare Created Volume Deleted Volume Volume Name Changed FC/iSCSI/SAS Port Parameters Changed FC/iSCSI/SAS Host Information Changed Host Name Defined LUN Mapping Changed Host Response Changed Reset Group Changed Error condition defined by SDP policy Warning condition defined by SDP policy Informational message defined by SDP policy

Setting value Not selected Not selected Not selected Not selected Not selected Not selected Not selected Not selected Not selected Not selected Not selected Not selected Not selected Not selected Not selected Not selected Not selected Not selected Not selected

Setting range

E-Mail SNMP Trap E-Mail SNMP Trap E-Mail SNMP Trap E-Mail SNMP Trap E-Mail SNMP Trap E-Mail SNMP Trap E-Mail SNMP Trap E-Mail SNMP Trap E-Mail SNMP Trap E-Mail SNMP Trap E-Mail SNMP Trap E-Mail SNMP Trap E-Mail SNMP Trap E-Mail SNMP Trap E-Mail SNMP Trap E-Mail SNMP Trap E-Mail SNMP Trap E-Mail SNMP Trap E-Mail SNMP Trap

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

318

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Appendix B Factory Default List >

Item Modify Date and Time Time Zone

Contents

Setting value Depending on the factory settings

Setting range

(GMT-12:00)
Eniwetok, Kwajalein

(GMT-11:00)
Samoa

(GMT-10:00)
Honolulu

(GMT-09:00)
Alaska

(GMT-08:00)
Los Angeles, San Francisco, San Diego

(GMT-07:00)
Phoenix, Calgary, Denver

(GMT-06:00)
Chicago, Mexico City

(GMT-05:00)
New York, Bogota

(GMT-04:00)
Caracas

(GMT-03:30)
Newfoundland

(GMT-03:00)
Sao Paulo, Brasilia

(GMT-02:00)
Mid-Atlantic

(GMT-01:00)
Azores Island, Cape Verde

(GMT+00:00)
Dublin, London, Manchester, Lisbon

(GMT+01:00)
Paris, Madrid, Stockholm

(GMT+01:00)
Rome, Vienna, Berlin

(GMT+01:00)
Milan, Amsterdam

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

319

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Appendix B Factory Default List >

Item Modify Date and Time Time Zone

Contents

Setting value Depending on the factory settings

Setting range

(GMT+02:00)
Athens, Helsinki, Cairo

(GMT+02:00)
Beirut, Cape Town

(GMT+03:00)
Nairobi, Moscow

(GMT+04:00)
Abu Dhabi

(GMT+05:00)
Islamabad, Karachi

(GMT+05:30)
New Delhi

(GMT+06:00)
Dhaka

(GMT+07:00)
Bangkok, Jakarta

(GMT+08:00)
Hong Kong, Manila, Singapore

(GMT+08:00)
Beijing, Taipei, Kuala Lumpur, Perth

(GMT+09:00)
Tokyo, Osaka, Kyoto, Fukuoka, Sapporo

(GMT+09:00)
Seoul

(GMT+09:30)
Adelaide

(GMT+10:00)
Guam, Sydney, Melbourne

(GMT+11:00)
Solomon Islands, New Caledonia

(GMT+12:00)
Wellington, Auckland, Fiji

Manually

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

320

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Appendix B Factory Default List >

Item Modify Date and Time

Contents Daylight Saving Time

Setting value Depending on the factory settings Depending on the factory settings Depending on the factory settings

Setting range

ON OFF NTP enabled NTP disabled MNT RMT


1 16 alphanumeric characters, symbols (except ',' and '?', and '% used as the first letter'), and blanks 1 50 alphanumeric characters, symbols (except ',' and '?', and '% used as the first letter'), and blanks 1 50 alphanumeric characters, symbols (except ',' and '?', and '% used as the first letter'), and blanks 1 50 alphanumeric characters, symbols (except ',' and '?', and '% used as the first letter'), and blanks

NTP Service

NTP server

LAN Port used for NTP

Modify Storage System Name

Set the Name of this Storage System

Name

Installation Location

Administrator

Description

Setup Encryption Mode Change Box ID

Encryption Mode

Disable

Enable Disable
40 alphabetic characters (upper case), numerals, symbols (#), and blanks

Box ID

Depending on the device

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

321

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Appendix B Factory Default List >

Item Setup Power Management Shutdown by External Power Management Unit

Contents Enable Delay until Shutdown (min.) Set management unit interface

Setting value Not selected 0 PMAN

Setting range

CM#0 CM#1
0 15 (minutes)

Power
Synchronized Unit

PMAN Manual
Power Failure Signal Low Battery Signal UPS Shutdown Signal Positive Positive Not selected Positive Setup Subsystem Parameters Load Balance Reject INQUIRY from Unauthorized Host Connection Set Loop ID Loop ID Manual Auto Transfer Rate (Gbit/s) Selected Not selected FC-AL Manual 0 Ascending Auto Negotiation

Positive Negative Positive Negative Enable Not selected Positive Negative Selected Not selected Selected Not selected Fabric FC-AL Manual Auto
Last 2 digits of 0x00 to 0x7D

Set FC Port Parameters (for "CA" port mode)

Ascending Descending For 4Gbit/s


models - Auto Negotiation - 1 - 2 - 4

For 8Gbit/s
models - Auto Negotiation - 2 - 4 - 8

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

322

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Appendix B Factory Default List >

Item Set FC Port Parameters (for "CA" port mode) Frame Size (bytes)

Contents

Setting value 2048

Setting range

2048 1024 512 Enable Disable 0:Default Host


Response (Number: Name)

Host Affinity Host Response

Disable 0:Default

Reset Scope Release Reservation if Chip is Reset Set FC Port Parameters (for "RA" port mode) Connection Set Loop ID Loop ID Manual Auto Transfer Rate (Gbit/s)

I_T_L Disable FC-AL Manual 0 Ascending Auto Negotiation

I_T_L T_L Enable Disable Fabric FC-AL Manual Auto


Last 2 digits of 0x00 to 0x7D

Ascending Descending Auto


Negotiation

2 4 8
Set iSCSI Port Parameters TCP/IP Settings IP Address Subnet Mask 192.168.x.y
(*2)

0 255 0 255 (255.255.255.255 is not allowed) 0 255

255.255.255.0

Default Gateway iSNS Server iSCSI Settings iSCSI Name

0.0.0.0 Disable iqn.200009.com.fujitsu: storagesystem.eternu s-dxl:00xxxxxx


(*3)

Enable Disable
1 233 alphanumeric characters and symbols ('-', ':', '.')

Alias Name

1 31 alphanumeric characters, symbols, and blanks

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

323

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Appendix B Factory Default List >

Item Set iSCSI Port Parameters General Settings

Contents Host Affinity Host Response

Setting value Disable 0:Default

Setting range

Enable Disable 0:Default Host


Response (Number: Name)

Jumbo Frame Transfer Rate

Disable 1Gbit/s

Enable Disable Auto


Negotiation

100Mbit/s 1Gbit/s
Reset Scope Release Reservation if Chip is Reset Security CHAP CHAP User Name I_T_L Disable OFF

I_T_L T_L Enable Disable ON OFF


0 255 alphanumeric characters, symbols, and blanks 12 100 alphanumeric characters, symbols, and blanks 12 100 alphanumeric characters, symbols, and blanks 12 100 alphanumeric characters, symbols, and blanks

Password

New Password

Confirm new Password

Header Digest Data Digest

OFF OFF

OFF CRC32C OFF CRC32C

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

324

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Appendix B Factory Default List >

Item Set SAS Port Parameters Port Settings

Contents Host Affinity Host Response

Setting value Disable 0:Default

Setting range

Enable Disable 0:Default Host


Response (Number: Name)

Reset Scope Release Reservation if Chip is Reset Setup Host Response Response Name

I_T_L Disable 0:Default

I_T_L T_L Enable Disable


1 16 alphanumeric characters, symbols (except ',' and '?', and '% used as the first letter'), and blanks

Byte-0 of Inquiry Response

No Conversion (Default) Type1 + Type3 (Default)

No
Conversion (Default)

Custom
Inquiry VPD ID Type

Type1 + Type3
(Default)

Type1 Type3
Inquiry Standard Data Version Version 5 (Default)

Version 5
(Default)

Version 4 Version 3
Command Timeout Interval Default (25sec.)

Default
(25sec.)

Customize
(10 - 255 sec.) (numerals) Load Balance Response [Disable] Unit Attention (Default)

[Disable] Unit
Attention (Default)

[Disable] Busy [Disable]


Queue Full Reservation Conflict Response for Test Unit Ready Change Volume Mapping Normal (Default) No Report (Default)

Normal
(Default)

Conflict No Report
(Default)

Report

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

325

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Appendix B Factory Default List >

Item Setup Host Response

Contents Volume Capacity Expansion

Setting value No Report (Default) No Report (Default) Normal (Default)

Setting range

No Report
(Default)

Report
Vendor Unique Sense Code

No Report
(Default)

Report
Host Specific Mode

Normal
(Default)

AIX Mode HP-UX Mode


Asymmetric / Symmetric Logical Unit Access ACTIVEACTIVE / PREFERRED _PATH (Default)

ACTIVEACTIVE / PREFERRED _PATH (Default)

ACTIVE /
ACTIVE Sense Data Conversion No Conversion (Default)

No
Conversion (Default)

Linux Recommended (When not using GRMPD)

Windows Recommended (When not using GR/ ETERNUS MPD or Device Driver)

Customize
SK/ASC/ASCQ

SK:
Sense Key

ASC:
Additional Sense Code

ASCQ:
Additional Sense Code Qualifier Modify Reset Group Set Reset Group Different reset groups for each port

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

326

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Appendix B Factory Default List >

*1: *2:

*3:

Different values are specified in the factory settings in order to distribute the load on the REMCS center. "x" in the setting value indicates the CM number. Values for "y" vary depending on the port number. CM0 Port-0 : 192.168.2.40 CM0 Port-1 : 192.168.2.41 CM1 Port-0 : 192.168.3.42 CM1 Port-1 : 192.168.3.43 "x" in the setting value indicates a specific 6-digit number that is assigned to each ETERNUS DX60/ DX80.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

327

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Appendix C The Maximum Number of Concurrent Volume Formats

The maximum number of concurrent volume formats (*1) differs depending on RAID levels, volume capacity, and the model. If 80 or more 2TB disks have been installed in the ETERNUS DX80/DX90, the maximum number of concurrent volume formats may be exceeded. In this case, an error message appears. Use the following procedure to check the maximum number of concurrent volume formats. Calculate the corresponding value for each formatting volume. When the total of corresponding values for all the formatting volumes is smaller than the maximum value, concurrent volume formats are available.
*1: Includes the volume format that is performed automatically when creating a new volume.

Procedure

Calculate the corresponding value for each formatting volume.


Use the following formula to calculate the value for each volume to be formatted.
Corresponding Value for each Volume = Volume Capacity (MB) / Coefficient

Volume capacity: The capacity of the volume to be formatted (MB). Coefficient The following table shows the coefficient for each RAID level where the target volume is registered.
RAID1 1D+1D Coefficient 4 RAID1+0 2D+2D 3D+3D 4D+4D 5D+5D 6D+6D 7D+7D 8D+8D 9D+9D 10D+10D 11D+11D 12D+12D 13D+13D 14D+14D 15D+15D 16D+16D Coefficient 4 6 8 5 6 7 8 4.5 5 5.5 6 6.5 7 7.5 8 RAID5 2D+1P 3D+1P 4D+1P 5D+1P 6D+1P 7D+1P 8D+1P 9D+1P 10D+1P 11D+1P 12D+1P 13D+1P 14D+1P 15D+1P Coefficient 4 6 8 5 6 7 8 4.5 5 5.5 6 6.5 7 7.5

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

328

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Appendix C The Maximum Number of Concurrent Volume Formats >

RAID5+0 (2D+1P) 2 (3D+1P) 2 (4D+1P) 2 (5D+1P) 2 (6D+1P) 2 (7D+1P) 2 (8D+1P) 2 (9D+1P) 2 (10D+1P) 2 (11D+1P) 2 (12D+1P) 2 (13D+1P) 2 (14D+1P) 2 (15D+1P) 2

Coefficient 8 12 16 10 12 14 16 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

RAID6 3D+2P 4D+2P 5D+2P 6D+2P 7D+2P 8D+2P 9D+2P 10D+2P 11D+2P 12D+2P 13D+2P 14D+2P

Coefficient 6 8 5 6 7 8 4.5 5 5.5 6 6.5 7

Compare the total of the corresponding values and the maximum number of concurrent volume formats.
If the total of the corresponding values is smaller than the maximum value, concurrent volume formats are available.
Total of Corresponding Values < Maximum Value

The total of corresponding values: Add up the corresponding values for each volume. The maximum value of concurrent volume formats: The following table shows the maximum value of concurrent volume formats for each model. The maximum value: 33,554,432

End of procedure
The following table shows an example when formatting volumes in the RAID5(5D+1P) in which the capacity is 9,331,200MB.
Number of volumes 17 18 Formula and corresponding value (9,331,200 / 5) 17 = 31,726,080 (9,331,200 / 5) 18 = 33,592,320 Concurrent volume format Available Not Available

Up to 17 volumes can be formatted concurrently. However, 18 or more volumes cannot be formatted. Retry the procedure after the current volume formatting is complete.

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

329

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Index
A
Add Drive Enclosure .................................. 284 Advanced ...................................... 20, 21, 190 Advanced Copy .................................. 138, 144 Management ....................................... 138 Status .................................................. 61

E
EC ........................................... 138, 139, Eco-mode Apply Eco-mode Schedule ...................... General Setting .................................... Schedule Setting .................................. 157 108 104 105

E-Mail .............................................. 155, 243 E-Mail Address .................................. 210, 217 ETERNUS SF AdvancedCopy Manager ......... 138 ETERNUS SF Storage Cruiser ..................... 295 Event Log ................................................ 287 Expander .................................................. 54

C
Change Box ID ......................................... 238 Change CM Ownership .............................. 109 Change Password ....................................... 26 Configure Affinity Group ............................... 67 Controller Enclosure .................................... 49 Controller Module

F
FC Set Port Parameters .............................. 252 Setup Host .......................................... 262 Firefox

.......................................

49

copy session ............................................ 162 list ....................................................... 61 manage .............................................. 151 Create Volume ........................................... 66

...............................................

11, 306

D ............................................... 66 Define LUN Mapping ................................... 67 Disk .................................................... 53, 56 maximum number ................................ 283 Disk Capacity ............................................. 70 Disk Error Statistics ................................... 299 Display Performance Information ................. 298 Display SMTP Log .................................... 211 Drive Enclosure .......................................... 54 maximum number ................................ 283
Define Host

G
GUI ........................................................... 9

H
host response set ..................................................... 252 Host Sense .............................................. 243 Hot Spare Assign ................................................. 94 Release ............................................... 96

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

330

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Index

I
Initialize Snap Data Volume ........................ 125 internal log

P
Port (for FC model)....................................... 50 (for iSCSI model) ................................... 51 (for SAS model)..................................... 52 Port Error Statistics .................................... 300 Power Supply Unit ................................. 52, 55

.................................

228, 287, 289

Internet Explorer .................................. 11, 301 iSCSI Set Port Parameters ............................. 255 Setup Host.......................................... 266

L
LAN .......................................................... 9 LAN cable ................................................. 12 LUN ......................................................... 67 Configure LUN Mapping ........................ 130 LUN Concatenation .............................. 119 number of LUNs................................... 131

Q
QuickOPC

........................................

142, 161

R
RAID Group Create ............................................ 66, Delete ................................................. Status ................................................. RAID level Number of disks that can be set ................ The maximum number of RAID groups that can be set ...................................

M
Mail Address ............................................ 219 MIB ........................................................ 201 MIB definition file ...................................... 206

88 93 57 88 89

................................................ 204 Modify Date and Time ................................ 233 Modify Port Mode ........................................ 26 Modify REC Buffer .................................... 186 Modify Storage System Name ..................... 235 Monitor ......................................... 20, 21, 190
MIB View

RAID Migration ......................................... 121 REC Buffer Status ...................................... 65 REC Multiplicity ......................................... 184

.................................................. ............................... REMCS ESAT ..........................................


Register Register Copy License

154 154 216

N
Name ....................................................... 48 NTP server .............................................. 234

O
OPC .......................................... 138, 141, 157 Operating Environment ................................ 11 Operating Topology ..................................... 12

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

331

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

Index

S
SAS Set Port Parameters ............................. 260 Setup Host.......................................... 269

W
web browser ........................................... 9, 11 When Host Affinity function is not used .......... 251 When the host affinity function is not used ....... 67 When the host affinity function is used ............ 67 When using Host Affinity function .................. 250 Windows Volume Shadow Copy Service ........ 138

........................................... 52, 55 SDP ....................................................... 143 SDPE ..................................................... 143 SDPV ..................................................... 143 Set Copy Path .......................................... 163 Set Date and Time ...................................... 26 Set Port Parameters ............................. 26, 252 Setup Encryption Mode .............................. 236 Setup Event Notification ............................. 243 Setup Log Sending Parameters ................... 228 Setup Network Environment .......................... 26 Setup Remote Support ............................... 216 Site Certificate .......................................... 301 Snap Data Volume (SDV) ........................... 143 SnapOPC+ .................... 125, 142, 151, 155, 161 SNMP Trap ....................................... 155, 243 SNMP Trap Test .................................. 207 SSD ....................................................... 283 Standard ....................................... 20, 21, 190 Start/Stop Performance Monitoring ............... 295 Stop/Restart Remote Support ...................... 231
SAS Cable Storage System Name Set ...................................................... 26

T
Turn on locator beacon ................................ 48

U
User Account Initialize .............................................. 195 Setup ................................................. 190

.................................... 190 User Role .................................................. 20


User Management

V
VDS ............................................. 26, 48, 235

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

332

Copyright 2010 FUJITSU LIMITED

ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

P2X0-0700-05ENZ0
Date of issuance: July 2010 Issuance responsibility: FUJITSU LIMITED

The contents of this manual are liable to being updated without notice. While the contents of this manual are the product of all due care and diligence, no responsibility can be accepted for operational problems arising from any errors or missing information, or other use of the information contained in this manual. Fujitsu assumes no liability for damages to third party copyrights or other rights arising from the use of any information in this manual. Contents of this manual are not to be reproduced without permission from Fujitsu.

You might also like